49
DUPRINTER DP-23S DP-21S DP-21L Ver.2 SERVICE MANUAL Be sure to read this manual carefully, so that you repair and service this machine safely and correctly. Do not begin work until you have thoroughly understood the contents of this manual. Repairing or servicing the machine with insufficient knowledge about it could lead to unforeseen accidents or falls in the machine's performance or quality. DUPLO SEIKO CORP.

dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 1/303

DUPRINTER 

DP-23S DP-21S DP-21L

Ver.2

SERVICE MANUAL

Be sure to read this manual carefully, so that yourepair and service this machine safely andcorrectly. Do not begin work until you havethoroughly understood the contents of this manual.Repairing or servicing the machine with insufficientknowledge about it could lead to unforeseenaccidents or falls in the machine's performance orquality.

DUPLO SEIKO CORP.

Page 2: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 2/303

1

Introduction

The cause of most accidents is failure to adhere to basic safety rules and observe

safety instructions. It is important to prevent potential causes of accidents from

occurring. In order to do so, read this manual carefully, and be sure to understand

all the safety instructions and correct inspection and servicing procedures that it

provides before beginning repair or servicing work.

Repairing or servicing the machine with insufficient knowledge about it could

lead to unforeseen accidents.

It is not possible to anticipate and describe in a manual such as this every possi-

ble hazard that could arise in the course of repair and servicing. Therefore, besides

observing the safety instructions marked in this manual and on the machine's

labels, service personnel should be safety-conscious and take other safety precau-

tions as necessary. When performing repair or service work not covered by this man-ual, you should obtain safety guidance from an appropriately knowledgeable person.

Copyright 2000

DUPLO SEIKO CORPORATION

All Rights Reserved

Page 3: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 3/303

2

'Safety-related instructions

'Service work-related instructions

If the instructions accompanying this symbol are ignored and the

machine is operated incorrectly, death or serious injury is likely to

result.

If the instructions accompanying this symbol are ignored and the

machine is operated incorrectly, death or serious injury, or else material

damage, is likely to result.

WARNING:

CAUTION:

Examples of pictorial symbols

A " " symbol tells you that a certain action is forbidden. Precisely what

is forbidden is indicated by a picture inside the symbol (in the example

here, the picture means that disassembly is forbidden), or in writing at the

side of the symbol.

A " " symbol means that a certain action is forbidden and/or that a

specific instruction must be followed. The specific instruction is indicated

by a picture inside the symbol (in the example here, the instruction is

"Remove the power plug from the socket").

IMPORTANT:

NOTE:

Draws attention to important information. If this information is ignored

and the machine is operated or serviced incorrectly, the machine`s

performance could drop, or it could break down.

Draws attention to information that is useful for operation or maintenance

of the machine, and to information about its performance, etc.

D Using the service manual

• This manual contains the following information: structure and function of major parts,

disassembly and reassembly procedures, specifications, and procedures for adjustment,

maintenance, inspection and corrective action. This information is current as of December

2000, and applies basically to the model DP-23S/DP-21S/DP-21L DUPRINTER.From time to time, parts are changed to improve quality, performance or safety. Note therefore

that in some cases, certain parts or machine structure aspects described in the text or

illustrations of this manual may not be precisely the same as the product being serviced.

• Safety instructions marked with a " " (WARNINGS and CAUTIONS) are very important for

safety and must be observed.

Page 4: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 4/303

3

Safety instructions

Safety instructions

Safety instructions

1. Cautions regarding the installation location

Installation environment

• Avoid installing the machine in places exposed to direct sunlight.

• Sunlight will cause the temperature in the machine's interior to rise, possibly leading to

malfunction of the control system.

• Sunlight could cause misoperation of the sensors.

• The heat of direct sunlight could cause deformation of the machine's plastic parts.* Also avoid installation near to a ground glass window; light and heat penetrate such windows

although they are opaque.

• Avoid installing the machine in places subject to high or low temperature or humidity.

• High or low temperature or humidity could cause the machine to operate abnormally.

Suitable temperature and humidity ranges are:

 Ambient temperature: 10y430y

 Ambient humidity: 40%470%

Optimum temperature and humidity: 20y, 65%

• If the machine is installed near to faucets, water heaters or humidifiers, or in cool (sunless)parts of a building or in the vicinity of water sources, the paper could absorb moisture and curl,

leading to misfeeds or poor image quality.

• Avoid installing the machine in places with open flames, or where reflected heat or other hot air

currents (from stoves, etc), or cold air currents from coolers, etc will strike it directly.

• Avoid installing the machine in poorly ventilated places.

• Avoid installing the machine in dusty places.

• The machine should not be tilting when it is used.

• Install the machine so that it is level.(The machine should be level to within 5mm in the front-rear direction, and 5mm in the lateral

direction.)

•Do not install the machine on shaky, sloping or otherwise unstable surfaces.

• The machine could fall over on such surfaces, or fall off them, causing injury.

Page 5: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 5/303

4

Safety instructions

• The machine's power supply voltage and power consumption depend on the model. Details of this

are given in the tables below. The power supply voltage and power consumption for the machine

are given in the table below. The machine's power supply voltage is indicated on the identification

plate located on the machine's left side; the machine must be connected to a power supply of the

 voltage indicated.

a Otherwise, fire or electric shock could result.

If the power supply voltage is unstable or if the power supply has insufficient capacity, the

machine may not operate normally.

Make sure that the power supply has sufficient capacity for the system as a whole, including 

optional equipment.

Warning

Connect to outlet of 120V AC, 60Hz, at least 15A

With no load*

At full load

Power consumption

No more than 130V AC

At least 110V AC

During platemaking : 190W

During printing at speed 3 (printing speed) : 85W

On standby : 15W

Power supply voltage

} Use power supply meeting these requirements

Connect to outlet of 230V AC, 50Hz, at least 8A

With no load*

At full load

Power consumption

No more than 250V AC

At least 210V AC

During platemaking : 190W

During printing at speed 3 (printing speed) : 85W

On standby : 15W

Power supply voltage

} Use power supply meeting these requirements

* 120V AC model

* 230V AC model

* "With no load" - when the machine is on standby.

* "At full load" - when the machine is running at maximum power consumption.

• Use only the power cord that is provided among the accessories.

Insert the power cord plug firmly into the socket, so that proper electrical contact is effected.

• Install the machine close to its power supply. The outlet used should be exclusively for the

machine, and have no other equipment connected to it.

If an extension cord is necessary, it should have a ground terminal, and be of the following ratings:

* For a 120V AC model: 130V, at least 15A, length not exceeding 5m.

* For a 230V AC model: 250V, at least 8A, length not exceeding 5m.

• Never tread on the power cord or pinch it between other objects, or accidents could result.

2. Cautions for installation work

• Install the machine in accordance with the installation procedure appended to this manual.

• Lock the casters after the machine is installed.

a Otherwise, the machine could move or fall over, causing injury.

• To move the machine, push it by its mounting base.

a Pushing the printing (upper) part of the machine could make it fall over.

CAUTION

Using the optional printer stand

Page 6: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 6/303

5

Safety instructions

' Precautions for safe servicing 

• Always remove the power cord plug from the outlet before starting work.

a Otherwise, you could get a shock or your hands/fingers could be injured.

• However, the plug must be left connected to the outlet when performing function checks (of 

individual motors, a given series of operations, or electrical circuits). When motors are

operated alone in function checks, interlocks are deactivated, so be aware of the conditions and

positions of related equipment, and take great care not to put your hands or fingers into

moving parts.

• The cutter unit contains hazardous sharp blades. Exercise great care when inspecting the cutterunit or replacing it or its parts.

a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could be injured.

• Do not touch the drum or rollers after turning on the jog switch.

• Do not put your hands or fingers inside the machine while the drum is rotating.

a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could get caught and crushed between the drum and rollers.

'Working clothes

• Wear clothing than enables you to work safely.

Warning

' Tools

• Use tools that are appropriate for the work.

CAUTION

3. Cautions for maintenance, inspection and servicing

• The tape clusters have hazardous blades. Exercise care when inspecting or replacing the

blades.a Otherwise, your hands/fingers could be injured.

If optional tape clusters are used

Page 7: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 7/303

6

Safety instructions

DLocations of warning stickers

The locations of the machine's warning stickers are shown below. To ensure safe work, read the

stickers and heed their instructions. Keep the stickers clean at all times. If they become damaged

or peel off, replace them with new ones.

No. Parts No. Name Q'ty

q L1-T3060 Warning Sticker 1 1

w L5-T3020 Warning Sticker 2 1

1

e

r

M7-T3030

L1-T3090

Warning Sticker 3

Caution Sticker

1

1

Page 8: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 8/303

7

Chapter 8

Chapter 7

Chapter 6

Chapter 5

Chapter 4

Chapter 3

Chapter 2

Chapter 1

Troubleshooting

HELP Mode

Chapter 9Others

Maintenance / Check

Installation

Standard / Adjustment

Mechanism

Description of the Operation

Introduction

Page 9: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 9/303

9

Table of Contents

Chapter 1

z Features................................................................................12

x Specifications ......................................................................14

c Dimensions ..........................................................................16

v Mechanism...........................................................................17

b Master ...................................................................................18

n Ink..........................................................................................19

m System Setup.......................................................................20

, Part Names and Their Functions........................................21

. Operation Procedures.........................................................29

⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action .............................30

⁄    1 Option ...................................................................................52

Chapter 2

z Scanner Section.........................................................56

x Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section.............64

c Paper Feed Section....................................................84

v Drum Driving Section................................................97

b Press Section...........................................................103

n Paper Ejection Section............................................106

m Drum Section ...........................................................111

, Option .......................................................................119

Chapter 3

z Exterior .....................................................................122x Scanner Section.......................................................127

c Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section...........135

v Paper Feed Section..................................................144

b Drum Driving Section..............................................148

n Paper Ejection Section............................................150

m Drum Section ...........................................................153

Chapter 4

z Scanner Section.......................................................162

x Platemaking/Master Feed/Ejection Section...........163

c Paper Feed Section..................................................171v Drum Driving Section..............................................176

b Press Section...........................................................178

n Paper Ejection Section............................................180

m Drum Section ...........................................................182

, Electrical System.....................................................186

. Option .......................................................................193

Chapter 5

zDUPRINTER Installation Instructions ....................196

Chapter 7

z Troubleshooting Guide............................................212x Error Display ............................................................228

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions.........298

x Overall Wiring Layout..............................................305

z HELP Mode List .......................................................230

x Overview...................................................................234

c HELP Mode Functions and Operation Procedures.......235

(1)Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes...235

(2)Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions ..............235

• HELP Mode Descriptions .....................................236

Introduction.................................................................................1

Using the service manual ..........................................................2

Safety instructions ...............................................................3

1.Cautions regarding the installation location........................3

2.Cautions for installation work ...............................................43.Cautions for maintenance, inspection and servicing .........5

• Locations of warning stickers................................................6

Troubleshooting

Chapter 6

z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance......................208

x Cleaning and Oiling.................................................208

c Periodical Maintenance...........................................209

Maintenance / Check

Installation

Standards / Adjustment

HELP Mode

Others

Mechanism

Description of the Operation

Introduction

Page 10: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 10/303

11

z Features........................................................................12

x Specifications...............................................................14

c Dimensions...................................................................16

vMechanism ...................................................................17

bMaster ...........................................................................18

n Ink..................................................................................19

m System Setup ...............................................................20

, Part Names and Their Functions................................21

1. Machine exteriors ....................................................21

2. Sectional (structural) view of the machine ...........24

3. Control Panel ..........................................................26

. Operation Procedures .................................................29

1. Printing.....................................................................29

⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action......................30

1. Error messages .......................................................30

2. Corrective action .....................................................32

(1) Replacing the Ink Pack ......................................32

(2) Replacing the Master Roll .................................34

(3) Replacing the Master Ejection Core..................37

(4) Supplying Paper ................................................39

(5) Replacing the Drum Unit ..................................43(6) Paper Jam (Feeder side).....................................45

(7) Paper Jam (Ejection side) ..................................46

(8) Master is Not Ejected.........................................49

(9) Master Set Incorrectly

("MASTER SET MISS"is displayed)..................51

⁄1 Option ...........................................................................52

1. DUPRINTER Option.................................................52

(1) TAPE CLUSTER 4.............................................52

1Chapter 1 Introduction

Page 11: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 11/303

12

chap.1  z Features

Enlargement

Reduction

Enlargement

Reduction

Enlargement

Reduction

Enlargement

Reduction

Enlargement

Reduction

  Size A/B models

• Zoom settings (70, 81, 86, 115, 122, 141%)

• Same-size (100%) printing 

141% [B5 /B4, A5 / A4]

122% [A4 /B4, A5 /B5]

115% [B5 / A4]

86% [A3 /B4, A4 /B5]

81% [B4 / A4, B5 / A5]

70% [A3 / A4, B4 /B5]

141% [A5 / A4]

122% [A5 /B5]

115% [B5 / A4]

86% [A4 /B5]

81% [B4 / A4]

70% [A3 / A4, B4 /B5]

Inchi size model

  • Zoom settings (64, 74, 77, 121, 129, 141%)

  • Same-size (100%) printing 

141%

129% [ST /LTR]

121%77% [LGL /LTR]

74% [LDG /LGL]

67% [LDG /LTR]

141%

129% [ST /LTR]

121%

77% [LGL /LTR]

74%

67% [LDG /LTR]

141%

129% [ST /LTR]

121%

77% [LGL /LTR]

74% [LDG /LGL]

67% [LDG /LTR]

zFeatures

1. Size B4 printing (DP-23S)

The DP-23S has size B4 (248X355mm) printing area.

The DP-21L has size A4 (210X355mm) printing area.

The DP-21S has size A4 (204X288mm) printing area.

2. High-speed platemaking

With the DP-23S/21S/21L, it takes 25 seconds*1 to

print the first sheet of paper.

*1: Time required to print the first sheet of paper after

the platemaking key is pressed.

3. High print quality

 A new, originally-developed superfine thermal head

gives beautifully accurate reproductions of fine print

and halftone photographs.

Its resolution is 300dpi in the main scanning direction and 600dpi in the sub scanning direction.

4. Align paper

 Adjusting the eject enables both thin and thick

sheets of paper to be aligned neatly.

5. High-performance lamp

 A long-life, high-brightness xenon arc lamp is used

to illuminate the documents. Since the lamp's

intensity is not affected by temperature variation*2,

printing quality at low temperatures is greatlyenhanced*3.

*2: The lamp is filled with xenon gas, which means that it

does not require heat to vaporize mercury, as a

fluorescent lamp does, and therefore its intensity does

not vary with temperature.

*3: Increased viscosity of the ink at low temperatures

results in fa inter print ing than at normal

temperatures.

6. Full range of necessary functions

qDocuments are easily enlarged or reduced.

In addition to same-size printing, there are threeautomatic settings for both enlargement and

reduction. The margin function (94% reduction)

can be used with any setting.

DP-23S

DP-23S

DP-21S

DP-21S

DP-21L

Page 12: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 12/303

13

chap.1  z Features

7. Options

qTAPE CLUSTER4

This permits sectionized printing, by

inserting tape automatically during 

printing.

wKEYCARD COUNTER4

This magnetic card can control the

numbers of prints and platemakings by up

to 200 sections.

NOTE:

Without this optional counter, the number

of sections controlled is 30 (standard).

eDrums

Replacing the drum with optional drums

permits printing with different colors.

rOn-line functions*5

These enable data processed on a personal

computer or word processor to be directly

input and used for platemaking/printing.

*5: This function require PC interface.

wSelf-diagnosis

The machine has a self-diagnosis system,

which notices user by flashing on and off 

a message and lighting up the relevant

lamp when a expendable part needs

replacing.

eError message display

 An LCD panel displays error messages and

messages prompting replenishment of 

consumables.

r2 in 1 Layout mode

This mode makes possible continuous

printing of 2 documents onto single sheets

of paper.

tAdjusting the Printing Position (vertical)

In addit ion to vert ical d irect ion

adjustment.

yKey card counter

Raises the number of sections controlled

to up to 200*4. Versions with internalized

control panel also available.

*4: Standard: 30 sections. Using the counter

(optional) raises the number to 200 sections.

uMemory function

 Allows 9 sets of memory settings.

Page 13: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 13/303

14

chap.1  x Specifications

xSpecifications

• Specifications

Product name/model No. DUPRINTER DP-23S DUPRINTER DP-21L DUPRINTER DP-21S

Model Table top model

Platemaking method Thermal digital platemakingPlatemaking interval 25 second(A4, same size)

Resolution 300dpi(Main scanning direction)x600dpi(Sub scanning direction)

Scanning method ADF/movable document

ADF capacity 100 sheets(64g/m2)

Document type

Stencil printing

Document size

Sheets

Document thickness

Max. 291 mm x 423 mm Min. 100 mm x 148 mm

Reading width

64g/m2 to 128g/m2

Printing area

297 mm x 432 mm

Feeding capacity

Max. 250 x 355 mm

Stacking capacity

1300 sheets (64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)

Paper size

900 sheets (64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)

*Cabinet [Option] : 1300 sheets ( 64g/m2, duodecimo 55kg, high grade paper)

Max. 297 mm x 432 mmMin. 100 mm x 150 mm

ADF capacity

Max. 210 x 355 mm Max. 204 x 288 mm

Max. 291 mm x 382 mmMin. 100 mm x 150 mm

Paper thickness 53g/m2

to 210g/m2

(45kg to 180kg)Postcard (multifeeder only) 128g/m2

Printing speed 120 pages par minute.(60 to 120 pages par minute, 3 step adjustment)

A, B size modelSame size 100%Fixed zoom ratios 70, 81, 86, 115, 122, 141%Print with border 94%

Inch size model Same size 100%

Fixed zoom ratios 64, 74, 77,Print with border 94%

Printing position adjustment Vertical 15 mmHolizontal 10 mm (Paper with the size of 297 mm x 420 mm or more : 5mm)

Image mode Text mode / Photograph mode / Text and photograph mode

Contrast control Platemaking density 3 step adjustment

Ink supply method Complete automatic control

Color printing Drum unit exchange method

Master feeder Roll master automatic feed

Plate ejection Complete automatic ejection plate rolling method

Plate ejection capacity 50 sheets

Plate ejection method Fan and paper ejection beltLCD panel Light and compact type LCD

Other standard function OK monitorConfidential Safeguard FunctionEntry of different number of prints or setsSpecial functionMemory functions2 in 1 layout mode

Print enlargement/reduction

Page 14: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 14/303

15

chap.1  x Specifications

• Specifications

• Option specifications

Product name/model No. DUPRINTER DP-23S DUPRINTER DP-21SDUPRINTER DP-21L

Power source

120VAC model120VAC 60Hz, 0.1A

Power consumption 190W(during platemaking), 85W(during 3rd -speed printing),

15W(during standby)

230VAC model 230VAC 50Hz, 0.2A

Size Operational Idle

Operating temperature 10Y430Y

Weigft Machine 68kg

When in use: 1270 (W) 9 673 (D)9 680 (H) mm

When folded away: 680 (W)9673 (D)9680 (H) mm

DUPRINTER DP-23S / DP-21L / DP-21S

Options Drum unit

KEYCARD COUNTER 4(built-in type)TAPE CLUSTER 4

PC interface kit

PC interface kit The printer driver must be installed in the PC.

Compatible with Windows95/98

Macintosh compatibility

(System 7.6.1 or later, MAC OS or later)

I/F board in main unit (on-line set III board unit)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Page 15: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 15/303

16

chap.1  c Dimensions

cDimensions

(mm)

        6       1       7

563

       4       7        2

       1        0       5

        3        8        0

       1        3        2

       4       7        8

       7        0       5

       5       1       7

229 470

1262

23S0202

Page 16: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 16/303

17

chap.1  v Mechanism

The machine carries out the processes of “platemaking” and “printing.”

Platemaking

In the “platemaking” process, the old master on the drum is removed while the

thermal head creates the scanned image on the new master and transfers it onto the

drum.

Printing

In the “printing” process, paper separated from the stack by the paper feed roller and

the paper separator unit is pressed against the drum unit by the press roller. There are

small holes over only the image area of the master that is attached to the drum, and ink 

that seeps from these holes is transferred to the paper. The paper is then peeled from

the master by the paper stripper finger. The paper is directed onto the paper ejection

belt by a fan unit and discharged from the machine.

vMechanism

Master roll Master ejection box

Drumunit

Thermal head

Drum unit

InkFeeder roller

Paper

Paper sepatator unit

Press roller

Paper stripper finger

Paper ejection belt

Fan unit

Page 17: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 17/303

18

chap.1  b Master

1. Characteristics of the master(1) Structure of the thermal master

(2) Functions and materials of the layers

Coated surface … Prevents the film from fusing, being damaged due to friction,being peeled,

and being conveyed defectively due to electric static charge.

Material: silicon fluorine mold lubricantThermal film …… Holes are made by the heat of the thermal head.

Material: Polyethylene terephthalate (polyester)

Adhesive ………… 1] Adheres the film to the base.

2] Does not prevent ink from seeping.

3] Increases impression endurance.

Base ……………… 1] Base material for the master. Fibrous layer

2] Ink seeps the base.

(3) Cross section of the master during platemaking

Holes are made on the coated surface, thermal film and adhesive, while base fiber, base materialfor the master, is left.

 A part of the film fused by the thermal head is stuck to the head or banks up.

(4) Printed image

 As the image consists of innumerable dots, it is taken as a continuous line through our eye.

  IMPORTANT :

  •Precautions to be taken in dealing in the master.

(1) Do not put a heavy thing on the box in which masters are packed.

•This may damage the master and may cause defective platemaking.

(2) Do not leave the master as it is after it is taken out.

•Foreign objects are stuck to the master and this may cause defective platemaking.

(3) Keep the master from direct sunlight, too high or low temperature and too high or low humidity.(Desirable storage temperature and humidity: 5-35 °C, 20-80%)

• If the master curls, defective plate attachment may occur.

bMaster

Page 18: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 18/303

19

chap.1  n Ink

IMPORTANT :

  • Precautions to be taken in handling ink

(1) Storage environment

• When an emulsion type ink is stored at too high or low temperature for a long time, oil and water in the

ink pack may be isolated. Keep the ink from too high or low temperature (5°C or less, 35°C or more).

 Also keep the ink from direct sunlight since the temperature rises sharply in the direct sunlight.

• When the water content is frozen, the water content is solidified and the bond characteristics decreases.

• When ink is stored at a high temperature, the bond characteristics decreases due to the change of the

surface conditions (surface tension, solubility). The bond characteristics also decreases due to evaporatinof the water content.

(2) Precautions to be taken in handling the ink pack

• When the ink pack is removed from the drum unit to store, put the ink pack with its mouth up, screw

the cap firmly after expelling air from the ink tube. (If air is in the ink pack, water content is generated.)

1. Characteristics of ink(1)Ink type

Ink for the digital printer is an emulsion type.

It has a water-in-oil type structure.

•Emulsion type

(2) 2 characteristics

The surface active agent has 2 characteristics: hydrophilic group and lipophilic group in 1 molecule.

Oil and water bond together by these 2 characteristics as shown in the figure.

(3) Temperature

Ink viscosity is high at a low temperature and it is low at a high temperature. So when ink is used at a

low temperature (10°C or less), the amount of ink transferred to the paper is smaller and the print

darkness is slightly lighter.

When ink is used at a high temperature (30°C or more), the amount of ink transferred to the paper is

larger and the print darkness is slightly darker.

nInk

Page 19: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 19/303

20

chap.1  m System Setup

mSystem Setup

The machine and its optional equipment are set up as follows:

• DDP system

Documents prepared on a personal computer can be printed on this machine.

The PC interface kit is required to connect this machine to a personal computer.

NOTE :

Duplo Direct Print System KEYCARD COUNTER 4

Drum unit : Option

TAPE CLUSTER 4

Cabinet (Printer stand)

Personal computer

Page 20: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 20/303

21

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

,Part Names and Their Functions

1. Machine exteriors

Document tray

Document guides ADF

LCD

Control panel

Front cover

Feed tray descendswitch

Feed pressureadjuster lever

Slide guides

Feed tray

Supplementalpaper tray

Power switch

Cabinet(Printer stand)

Caster locks

Document receiving tray(Top cover)

Page 21: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 21/303

22

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

Master coverrelease lever Master cover

Document receiving tray(Top cover)

Master set lever Master roll

Ink pack holder release lever Front cover

Drum handle

Drum unit

Ink pack Drum securing lever

Page 22: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 22/303

23

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

Master ejection boxrelease lever

JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)

Print tray

Paper stopper

Paper stacker guides

Master ejection core

Master ejection box

Master ejection boxlid release lever

Page 23: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 23/303

24

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

No.

1

2

2A

2B

2C

3

4

5

6

7

8

Scanne

Platemak

Platem

Master

Master c

Paper f

Drum d

Press s

Paper e

Print tra

Drum s

2. Sectional (structural) view of the machine

2

3

2A

1

6

2B

4,8

2C1

6

2B

4,8

Page 24: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 24/303

26

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

1. Keys outside of the panel cover

3. Control Panel

No. Name Function

q “OK” monitor Flashes to display the content of the trouble and lights to indicated

the part that caused the trouble in the machine.

w “ENLARGEMENT” key Press to set the enlargement ratio.

“100%” key Press to reset the ration to 100%.

“REDUCTION” key Press to set the reduction ratio.

100% lamp Lights when the 100% ratio is selected.

e “DOCUMENT MODE Press to switch between the text mode, text/photograph mode and

photograph mode. Each press of this key moves the position of the lit

lamp that indicates the selected document mode.

Document mode indicator lamps The lamp of the selected mode lights.

r LCD panel Displays the number of printed paper.

Also displays an error message when an error occurs.

t “FUNCTION SWITCH” key Press to toggle between the normal mode and the function select

mode.

“SELECT” key Press to select a function.

y “TEST PRINT” key Press to print only one piece of paper for checking the print darkness

or printed position.

u “PLATEMAKING” key Press to start platemaking.

SWITCH” key

No. Name

i “STOP” key

o “PRINT” key

!0 “ALL CLEAR” key

!1 X =   key

!2 Key pad

!3 “CLEAR” key

!4 Printing speed indicator lamp

!5 “PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT

!6 “PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT

!7 Printing position indicator lamp

STD STD  

1: 1

q w e

!4!5!7 !6

1

X = 

T

y

r

t

!0!1!2!3

LCD panel

a see page 28

Page 25: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 25/303

28

chap.1  , Part Names and Their Functions

2. LCD Panel

No. Name Function

q Print count Displays the number of prints to be made.

w Sets Displays the number of sets to be printed.

0sht 1set

q w

Page 26: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 26/303

29

chap.1  . Operation Procedures

.Operation Procedures

1. Printing

Printing speed adjustment / keys

Printing position adjustment / keys

1 Set document

2 Platemaking key

4 Print key

3Input the number of printsand the number of sets

5 End

Function switch keySelect key

Document mode switch key

Test print keyT

Reduction is selected.

Document size is selected.

Photograph mode is selected.

Plate darkness is switched.

Selects Texts, Text/Photograph &Photograph mode.

When the number of prints is input inadvance, printing starts automaticallyafter platemaking.

Printing position is adjusted.

Printing speed is adjusted.

Printing is tested (a sheet of paper.)

Input the number of prints andthe number of sets on the key pad.

Page 27: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 27/303

30

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

1. Error messages

⁄0Error Messages and Corrective Action

The LCD displays a message when the replenishment of consumables or the assistance of 

service personnel is required.

Message See page

32

34

37

39

43

44

4

4

Cause and corrective action

There is no ink.

Replace the old ink pack with a new one.

Cause :

Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :

Action:

Cause :

Action:

Cause :Action:

There is no master.

Replace the master roll with a new one.

The master ejection core is full.Replace the core with a new one.

There is no paper in the feed tray.

Load the feed tray with printing paper.

There is no drum.

Install a drum in the machine.

The front cover is open.Close the front cover.

The ADF cover is open.

Close the ADF cover.

The document receiving tray is open.

Close the document receiving tray.

EXCHANGE INK

ROLL - MASTER END

EXCHG. EJECT - CORE

SET PRINT PAPER

DRUM NOT SET

FRONT COVER OPEN

SCANNER OPEN

DOC. TRAY OPEN

 A paper jam has occurred on the ejection side.

Inspect the ejection side and remove the jammed paper.

Master roll cover is open.

Close the cover.

The master roll is not set correctly.

Reset is correctly.

PAPER RIGHT JAM

 A paper jam has occurred on the ejection side.

Inspect the ejection side and remove the jammed paper.

PAPER LEFT JAM

MAST. COVER OPEN

RESET MAST. ROLL

45

46

4

51

Page 28: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 28/303

31

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

Message See page

51

228

4

4

4

Cause and corrective action

There is an error during master setting.

Open the top cover and remove the master that isleft in the plate feeder.

The document is jammed on the ADF.

Open the ADF cover and remove the jammed document.

The printer is not ready.

Please wait with the power ON.

Insert the key card into the KEYCARD COUNTER.

4

Cannot print.

This message is displayed if you press (PRINT)

or (TEST PRINT) keys without making a plate

immediately after a master setting error or when the

confidential safeguard function is ON.

4

Printing is not complete.Either press (PRINT) key to resume printing or

press (CLEAR) key to clear the counter.C

T

PLS PLATE MAKING

PRINTING

MASTER SET MISS

MAST. EJECT ERROR

DOCUMENT JAM

PLEASE WAIT

SET KEYCARD

There is an old master on the drum.

Remove all the masters from the drum. 49

•If the message remains after a few minutes, turn the

power OFF and ON again.

•If the message still remains after a few minutes, turn

the power OFF and contact your service person.

•Report the error code and details of error occurrence

to service personnel.

Cause :Action:

Cause :

Action:

Cause :Action:

Cause :Action:

Action:

Cause :Action:

Follow the procedure below.

qRecord the error message "E***".

w Shut off the power and turn it back on.

eIf the message is displayed again, contact service

personnel.

SERVICE CALL( "E***" flashes )

Action:

Cause :Action:

* For displayed messages other than those listed above, refer to Chapter 7

"Troubleshooting".   a See page 212

Page 29: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 29/303

32

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

IMPORTANT :• Only use ink packs designed for this machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the front cover.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Grasp the lever and pull it toward you.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift out the empty ink pack.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Remove the cap from a new ink pack.

IMPORTANT :• Do not leave an ink pack uncapped for longer

than necessary.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

2. Corrective action

(1) Replacing the Ink Pack

Master roll Master ejection box

Drumunit

Thermal head

Ink pack

Lever

Ink pack

Page 30: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 30/303

33

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Insert the ink pack so that the groove on the lip

fits onto the “U” groove of the holder.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Push the ink pack in to the set line on the ink

pack.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the back of the holder in with the palm of 

your hand.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the front cover.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Set line

Set line

Front cover

"U" groove of holder

Page 31: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 31/303

34

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

IMPORTANT :• Only use a master roll designed for use in this machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the document receiving tray.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the master cover release lever.

The master cover will open up.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift out the master roll.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Take out a new master roll from the bag.   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(2) Replacing the Master Roll

Document receiving tray

Master coverrelease lever

Master cover

Master roll

Page 32: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 32/303

35

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Insert the master roll into the machine so that

the green line on the roll is facing the control

panel.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Peel off the seal.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Pull out the master, and pass it under the bar.

WARNING

• Do not remove the cover with WarningLabel 1.• You may be injured by the movable cutter

inside the machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Push in the master, aligned with the setline,

until the master's leading edge contacts the

interior surface.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Seal

Green line

Warning label 1Bar

Set line

23S0005

23S0006

23S0003

23S0002

Pay attention to orientation

Master roll

Page 33: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 33/303

Page 34: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 34/303

37

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

IMPORTANT :• Use only a master ejection core designed for use in this machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the master ejection box release lever to

open the master ejection box.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the master ejection box until it stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the cover while pressing and holding the

lid release lever.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Holding the edges of the master ejection core,

pull out the core and discard it.

IMPORTANT :• Ink adheres to the master ejection core. Take

care to prevent ink from getting onto your

clothing.

(3) Replacing the Master Ejection Core

Master ejection box release lever

Master ejection boxlid release lever

Page 35: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 35/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

38

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Insert a new master ejection core.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Gently close the master ejection box cover,

pressing it until it locks.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it

locks.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Master roll Master ejection box

Drum

unitThermal head

Page 36: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 36/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

39

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the supplemental paper tray if it is closed.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the lever and adjust the side guides to the

paper size.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Load a stack of aligned sheets between thepaper guides and press the stack lightly toward

the machine.

IMPORTANT :• You can load the feed tray with approximately

1,300 sheets of 55gsm high-grade paper.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(4) Supplying Paper

Supplying Paper

Page 37: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 37/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

40

Changing Paper Selection

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press (STOP) key.Printing stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the feed tray descend switch continuously.

Release the switch when the feed tray is at the

proper height.The feed tray will stop.

IMPORTANT :

• If the sheet is still in the paper feed roller, pull itout and align it with the stack.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Remove paper from the feed tray.The feed tray will automatically descend.

T

Feed tray descend switch

Page 38: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 38/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

41

If Paper Runs Out During Printing

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

If paper runs out during printing, printing stops and the feed tray is lowered

automatically. aaaaa See page 39

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

When the feed tray comes to a syop, reset the paper size.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press (PRINT) key.The feed tray will rise automatically and printing will

resume.

Adding Paper While Printing

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press (STOP) key.Printing stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the feed tray descend switch continuously.

Release the switch when the feed tray reaches

the proper height.The feed tray will stop.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

T

T

Feed tray descend switch

Page 39: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 39/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

42

IMPORTANT :• If the sheet is still in the feed roller ring, pull it

out and align it with the stack.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Align the stack to be added and place it on top

of the existing stack. Press the stack lightlytoward the machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press (PRINT) key.

The feed tray will rise automatically and printing will

resume.

NOTE :

• When you press (STOP) key, printing

stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

T

Page 40: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 40/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

43

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press and hold the JOG switch until the drum

comes to a stop with a beep.

WARNING

• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.

• Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the front cover toward you.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift the drum securing lever toward you and,holding it there, then pull out the drum handle

straight toward you until it stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the handle on the far end of the drum, and

lift the front end of the drum slightly to pull the

drum toward you.

IMPORTANT :• Do not touch the drum surface. Ink may

transfer to your clothes.• Hold the drum level and place it on a flat,

solid surface.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(5) Replacing the Drum Unit

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

Front cover

Drum securing leverDrum handle

Handle for endof clrum

Page 41: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 41/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

44

Installing the Drum Unit

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the drum level and place the drum guide

roller onto the rail in the machine.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Release the handle at the far end of the drum

and press the drum in about 10cm while lifting

up the front end slightly.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the drum level and press it in gently until it comes to a stop.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift the drum securing lever toward you while

pressing the drum in.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lower the lever.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the front cover.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Roller

Rail

Lever

Lever

Page 42: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 42/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

45

If the message "PAPER LEFT JAM" is indicated in the LCD,

check the feeder side and remove the jammed paper by

following the procedure below.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Switch to lower the feed tray slightly.

The feed tray is lowered for the time that the

switch is pressed.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Pull out the jammed paper as shown in the

diagram.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press and hold the JOG switch until the drum

comes to a stop with a beep.

WARNING

• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.

• Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(6) Paper Jam (Feeder Side)

PAPER LEFT JAM

Feed tray descend switch

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

Page 43: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 43/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

46

If the message "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is indicated in the LCD,

check the ejection side and remove the jammed paper by

following the procedure below.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the master ejection box relase lever to

open the master ejection box.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the master ejection box until it stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Remove the jammed paper.Press the JOG switch to eject the partially printed paper.

WARNING

•Do not touch the drum or rollers when you

operate the JOG switch.•Do not put your hands or fingers inside the

machine while it is operating. Your handsmay be pulled in or nipped.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it

locks.   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(7) Paper Jam (Ejection Side)

PAPER RIGHT JAM

Master ejection box release lever

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

Page 44: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 44/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

47

Paper Adhering to Drum

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the master ejection box relase lever to

open the master ejection box.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the master ejection box until it stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the JOG switch to find the edge of the

paper, then stop the drum at the position shownin the diagram.

WARNING

• Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.

• Do not put your hands inside the machinewhile it is operating. Your hands may bepulled in or nipped.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Peel off the edge of the paper from the drum.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Master ejection box release lever

Paper edge

Page 45: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 45/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

48

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Pull the paper toward the ejection side while

pressing the JOG switch to peel the paper off.

IMPORTANT :• Make sure that the peeled paper does not

stick to your clothing.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the JOG switch down until the drum

comes to a stop with a beep.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it

locks.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Make another plate.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

Page 46: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 46/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

49

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the master ejection box release lever to

open the master ejection box.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the master ejection box until it stops.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press the JOG switch to find the edge of thepaper, then stop the drum at the position shown

in the diagram.

WARNING

•Do not touch the drum or rollers when youoperate the JOG switch.

•Do not put your hands inside the machinewhile it is operating. Your hands may bepulled in or nipped.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift the lever toward you.

The master clump opens and the edge of the master will be

released from the clump. If the master is stuck, release itmanually.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(8) Master is Not Ejected

Master ejection box release lever

Master

Lever

Master clump

Page 47: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 47/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

50

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Return the lever.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Pull the front end of the master toward you and

press the JOG switch intermittently.Hold the switch down until the master peels off.

IMPORTANT :• Discard the old master, making sure that it

does not touch your clothing.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Hold the JOG switch down until the drum comes to a stop with a beep.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Close the master ejection box, pressing it until it

locks.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Press (STOP) key.The message is deleted.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Make another plate.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)

JOG switch (Drum rotator switch)

T

Page 48: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 48/303

chap.1  ⁄0 Error Messages and Corrective Action

51

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open the document receiving tray.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Remove the master left in the master feeder.

Set the master roll.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Gently close the document receiving tray.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Check that the error message is deleted.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Make a new plate and start printing.

IMPORTANT :

• The message “PLS PLATE MAKING” is displayed on the LCD panel when (PRINT) keyis pressed without platemaking being carried out.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

(9) Master Set Incorrectly("MASTER SET MISS" is displayed)

Document receiving tray

Page 49: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 49/303

chap.1 ⁄1Option

52

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Open out the tape cluster body.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Remove the old tape core.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Install the new tape. Make sure it will wind off 

in the correct direction.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Lift up the lever and pass the tape through the

slot.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Make about 1cm of tape protrude out of the

slot.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

Swing the tape cluster body back in.

   ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○   

⁄1Option

1. DUPRINTER Option

(1) TAPE CLUSTER 4

23S0031

23S0030

43SH0104

23S0029

Tape cluster body

Lever

Tape

1cm

Page 50: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 50/303

chap.1  ⁄1Option

53

MEMO

Page 51: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 51/30354

Chapter 2 Description of the Operation

z Scanner Section...........................................................56

1. Description...............................................................56

2. Sequence of Operation ...........................................57

(1) Document detection............................................57

(2) Basic Operation for Feeding Paper to Scanner.58

(3) Operation on Continuous Platemaking ............59

3. Function of Parts and Circuit .................................60

(1) Document Sensors..............................................60

(2) CCD / Lamps ......................................................61

(3) Scanner Stepping Motor / Clutch A, B ..............62

(4) ADF Cover(Scanner Cover)

Open / Close Detection .......................................63

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section...........64

Platemaking / Master Feed Section ........................64

1. Description...............................................................64

2. Sequence of Operation ...........................................65

(1) Operation when the master set

switch is turned on.............................................65

(2) Platemaking / Master Feeding ..........................66

3. Function of Parts ....................................................67

(1) Thermal Head.....................................................67

(2) End Mark Sensor ...............................................70

1. Master Setting Error Detection ......................71

2. Master End Detection......................................71

(3) Master Position Sensor ......................................72

(4) Cutter Unit.........................................................73(5) Master Feed Clutch (Electromagnetic clutch)..74

(6) Document Receiving Tray

Open / Close Detection.......................................75

Master Ejection Section ...........................................76

1. Description...............................................................76

2. Circuit .......................................................................76

3. Function of Parts ....................................................77

(1) Master Ejection Sensor ......................................77

1. Plate Ejection Error Detection........................77

2. Rotation Control of the Roll-up Motor............77

Master Clump opening/Closing Section ................78

1. Description...............................................................78

2. Operation of Master Clump Open / Close Lever ........79

(1) Structure.............................................................79

(2) Plate Attachment / Detachment Operation......80

(3) Clump Opening / ClosingLever Position (A / B / C Mode) .........................81

3. Function of Parts ....................................................82

(1) A / B / C Mode Sensor.........................................82

4. Returning Operation Flowchart

When the Power is Cut Off Accidentally ...............83

c Paper Feed Section......................................................84

1. Description...............................................................84

2. Operation .................................................................85

(1) Rotation of the Paper Feed Roller and

Timing Roller .....................................................85

(2) Paper Feed Roller Drive.....................................86

(3) Driving of the Timing Roller..............................87

(4) Escape the Guide Roller

DP-21S/L ............................................................88

DP-23S................................................................89

(5) Paper Feed Length .............................................90

3. Function of Parts.....................................................91

(1) Printing Position Adjustment Mechanism........91

(2) Signal Lever........................................................93

(3) Feed Tray (Elevator) Upper Limit Sensor ........94(4) Feed Tray (Elevator) Lower Limit Sensor ........95

(5) Paper Sensor.......................................................96

Page 52: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 52/30355

2v Drum Driving Section ..................................................97

1. Description...............................................................97

2. Function of Parts ....................................................98

(1) Home Position / Jam Detection

Position Sensor ..................................................98

(2) Master Attachment / Detachment

Position Sensor ..................................................99

(3) Jog Switch(Drum Rotator Switch)...................100

(4) Control of the Main Motor ...............................101

1. Rotation Speed Control by Encoder Sensor .102

2. Selecting the Speed........................................102

b Press Section .............................................................103

1. Description.............................................................103

(1) Press Roller Timing & Printing Area..............103

2. Function of Parts ..................................................105

(1) Press Roller (P Roll) Sensor.............................105

n Paper Ejection Section ..............................................106

1. Description.............................................................106

2. Function of Parts ..................................................107

(1) Paper Stripper Finger ......................................107

(2) Jam Sensor ......................................................108

1. Paper Jam Detection Timing ........................109

(3) Paper aligning mechanism ..............................110

m Drum Section .............................................................111

1. Description.............................................................111

2. Circuit .....................................................................112

3. Function of Parts ..................................................113

(1) Ink Detection ....................................................113

1. LED Display and Output Signal on

the Ink Detection PCB Unit..........................114

2. "CHANGE INK" Display Timing..................115

(2) Ink Pump ..........................................................116

(3) Drum Switch.....................................................117

(4) Front Cover Open / Close Detection Switch....118

, Option .........................................................................119

(1) TAPE CLUSTER..............................................119

Page 53: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 53/30356

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

zScanner Section

1. Description

The machine contains a scanner of the document moving type which scans images while the document isfed.The document is illuminated with the lamps while being transferred, and the reflection in proportion to

the document image darkness is imaged on the CCDs through the mirror and lens. Then the image is

resoluted into picture elements and converted photoelectrically into the level of electricity simultaneously.

The document is fed and carried by a single stepping motor. Two clutches (A and B) are used to engage or

disengage the ADF feed roller and the feed roller.The clutch is turned on only for feeding paper to engage the

scanner stepping motor with the driving system for the ADF feed roller. After the document reaches the feed

roller, clutch A is turned off and clutch B is turned on.The roller follows the movement of the document (fed by

the ejection roller).

23S0203

Document position sensor

Glass

Mirror Mirror Lens

ADF feed roller

Document sensor

Clutch A

ADF paper separator unit

Feed roller

Clutch B

Scanner JAM sensor

Shading plate

Ejection roller

Roller

Lamp

CCDEjection roller Roller

Page 54: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 54/303

Page 55: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 55/30358

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

(2) Basic Operation for Feeding Paper to Scanner

(1) Paper feed 1

When the document is placed on the document

receiving tray, the document sensor is

photointerrupted and detects the presence of the

document. Pressing the PLATEMAKING key

turns on the scanner stepping motor and clutch

 A, feeding the document.

(2) Positioning

Clutch A and the stepping motor are turned off 

when the document is fed 16mm after the JAM

sensor is photointerrupted. This prevents the

position of the documents from deviating, which

is caused by meandering during paper feeding. If 

the front end of the document does not reach the

document sensor within 5 seconds after the JAM

sensor is photointerrupted, DOCUMENT JAM

will be displayed.

(3) Paper feed 2

The scanner stepping motor and clutch B are

turned on again and the document is fed.

(4) Reading the document

 After the front end of the document is detected

at the document sensor, the document is fed

several steps, and shading is performed on

approximately 2mm of the front end of thedocument.

Operation

2Paper feed 1

2Reading the document

Document Document sensor

2Positioning

Lamp

Glass

Scanner JAMsensor

Documentposition sensor(Photointerrupting)

23S0204

23S0206

23S0207

Ejection roller

Page 56: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 56/30359

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

Operation

(1) Paper feed 1 for the second document

If the document sensor is photointerrupted whenthe document has been ejected and platemaking 

process is finished at the master feeding section,

it is determined that the next document exists

and the scanner stepping motor, and the clutch A 

is turned on to feed the document.

(2) Positioning

When the front end of the document reaches the

document position sensor, the document position

sensor is photointerrupted and detects the front

end of the document, which turns off the scanner

stepping motor and the clutch A to hold.This

method assures stable positioning of the

document.

(3) Reading the document

 After the front end of the document is detected

at the document sensor, the document is fed

several steps, and shading is performed on

approximately 2mm of the front end of the

document.

When PLATEMAKING key is

pressed, the print section

detaches the plate and then the

drum moves to the plate

attachment position to open the

master clamp, while ADF remains

held.

IMPORTANT :

(3) Operation on Continuous Platemaking

23S0211

23S0212

23S0213

Document sensor

Documentposition

sensor

2nd document

2nd document

Glass

Lamp

2nd document

1st document

Page 57: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 57/30360

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

3. Function of Parts and Circuit

(1) Document Sensors

Description

The document sensors detect the five types of document detection.1.Detection of the document

2.Detection of the front end of the document

3.Detection of the rear end of the document

4.Detection of the finish of the document

5.Detection of document jam

Scanner JAM sensor

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN5-41

2

3 -6

Orange -5

5V5V

0

Document sensor

Red

Blue

CN5-11

2

3 -3

Yellow -2

5V5V

0

Document position sensor

Red

Blue

CN4-11

2

3 -3

Yellow -2

5V5V

0

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

Circuit

Operation

Document sensor

Scanner JAM sensor

Document positionsensor

23S0214

23S0319E

Page 58: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 58/30361

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

(2) CCD / Lamp

Description

The lamp illuminates the document and the reflected light is transmitted onto the CCDs.The CCDs output

the image signals in level of voltage.

This machine adopts a xenon lamp which is lit quickly when turned on, and the quantity of light is stable.The

lamp is lit when the the control signal CN1-1 for the lamp inverter unit is LOW (0V) .

The table below shows the specification for the CCD.

Circuit

• Lamp

• CCD

Specification

No. Item Specification

1 Optical signal storage time (SH cycle) 2.048 msec/line

2 Frequency 3.375MHz

3 The number of effective picture elements 3000 picture elements

4Reading width(This is not the image width which can be processed.)

254mm

5 Reading density 11.8 dot/mm(300DPI)

Page 59: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 59/30362

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

23S0325E

(3) Scanner Stepping Motor/Clutch A, B

The rollers for ADF are driven by the scanner stepping motor (PM1) .The paper feed roller is engaged with the

drive system when the scanner clutch (CL1) is turned on.

Scanner stepping motor

Clutch A

Clutch B

Drive PCB Unit

Light green

Pink

Blue

Yellow

-5

-6

-7

-8White -9

Black CN5-4

Brown

Purple

-10

-11

Brown

Light blue

Black

Black

Black

Black

-12

-13

21

21

31

4

3

6

5

Circuit

Operation

Page 60: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 60/30363

z Scanner Sectionchap.2

When the ADF cover (scanner cover) is closed, the switch’s actuator is pressed down and the switch is OPEN.

When the cover is opened, the actuator is released and the switch is CLOSED.

Description

Opening and closing of the ADF cover (scanner cover) is sensed by a microswitch. If this cover has not

been completely closed, “SCANNER OPEN” will be displayed.

2When the ADF cover is opened2When the ADF cover is closed

ADF cover switch

Main PCB Unit

Yellow

Yellow

Yellow

Yellow

CN3-1

-3

5V

5V0

1

3

Circuit

Operation

(4)ADF Cover (Scanner Cover) Open / Close Detection

ADF cover

Actuator isreleased

ADF cover

23S0292

23S0311E

Actuator ispressed

Page 61: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 61/30364

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

xPlatemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section

Make the master clump of the drum unit clump the master top end, performing platemaking on the master

with the thermal head. (In this machine, the master on the drum is ejected at the same time when

platemaking is performed.)

The master is conveyed to the drum unit via the platen roller and sponge roller by driving of the stepping 

motor, while it is being processed in the head section. Sponge roller is driven through the master feeding 

clutch (electromagnetic clutch), and controls the amount of master conveyed to the master clamp section of thedrum unit with the master feeding clutch ON / OFF.

The end mark sensor starts to detect when the end mark (black) section printed on the end of the roll master

is conveyed. "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed on the error display panel. The endmark sensor also detects

whether the master is conveyed properly through the sensor.

Cutter unit

Master feeding clutch Sponge roller

Master position sensor

Master cover switch

Platen roller

Roll master

Thermal head

Stepping motorEnd mark sensor

1. Description

Platemaking / Master Feed Section

Platemaking / Master Feed section

Master Clump Opening / 

Closing Section Master Ejection Section

See page 76See page 78

63S00207

23S0273

Drum unit

Page 62: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 62/30365

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

2. Sequence of Operation

(1) Operation when the master set switch is turned on

Master

Master set lever

Platen roller

Master position sensor

Photo passing / Photo interrupting

Sponge rollerSwitch ON

23S0217

23S0218

When the master set lever is switched on, the platen

roller and sponge roller rotate and feed out

the document for 10 seconds.

When the master position sensor is interrupted, the

master is fed a few steps and stopped.

HELP mode H-29  \ see p.268

Page 63: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 63/30366

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Operation

When platemaking operation starts, the drum unit

rotates to perform plate detachment process. The

drum which has finished plate detachment process

stops at the plate attachment position.

Open the master clump.

Sponge roller rotates with the master feeding clutch

ON. A certain amount of the master tip end is fed to

the master clump section and the sponge roller

stops.

Open the master clump

 After the master clump is closed and clump the

master tip end, the drum rotates to roll up the

master.

When the master bottom end reaches the top of the

drum, plate attachment is completed. Commence

printing.

Master feeding clutch

Sponge roller

Master tip end

Master clump

Drum

Cutter

*Check the length of the master anddrum rotation angle to control the

drum rotation.

*As the electromagnetic clutch is OFF,

the sponge roller is free.

(2) Platemaking / Master Feeding

63S00211

63S00212

63S00213

63S00214

63S00215

Page 64: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 64/30367

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

(1)Thermal Head

Description

The thermal elements are in alignment in the scanning direction, and are heated on the image section to

make holes on the master film.

Specifications

Circuit

3. Functions of Parts

Drive PCB unit

CN6-1

-14

Drive PCB unit

CN3-1

-24

   T   h  e  r  m  a   l   h  e  a   d

No. Item DP-23S/DP-21S/DP-21L

1 Picture element density 300DPI (11.8 dot/mm)

2 Effective memory width 260.2 0.1mm

23S0320

Page 65: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 65/30368

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Exterior and Lot No.

Lot No.

Lot No. is shown with 4 digits including alphabet. Each digit has the following meanings. Serial No. in

the production month Production month (See the table) Production year

Serial No.

Serial No. in the production month

Production month (See the table)

Production year (Year of decade)

 A B C D E F G H I J K L

Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May. Jun. Jul. Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec.

Sign

Month

NOTE :

Lot No.

Model name Lot No.

Label

Thermal resistor line

276.0 0.2

260.16 0.1

Signal connector

Pin (No.1)Pin (No.1)

Power connector

Resistance

23S0221

23S0222

Thermistor

Page 66: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 66/30369

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

NOTE :

23S0326

Resistance value ( ) H-44

3825 3908 0000

3909 3993 0001

3994 4077 0010

4078 4162 0011

4163 4246 0100

4247 4330 0101

4331 4415 0110

4416 4499 0111

4500 4583 1000

4584 4668 1001

4669 4752 1010

4753 4837 1011

4838 4921 1100

4922 5005 1101

5006 5090 1110

5091 5175 1111

Resistance value

ResistanceResistance value is described on the label. When the head is replaced and the HELP mode is

initialized, set the DIP-SW (H-44) of the HELP mode.

HELP mode H-44  \ see p.280

Page 67: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 67/303

Main PCB Unit

End mark sensor PCB unit

CN2-4CN1-1

-2

-3 -6

-5

5V5V

5V

VR1

05V

Blue

Light green

Red

Blue

Light green

Red

1

2

3

70

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Reflection light amount

The larger the reflection light amount is, the

smaller the output voltage is. The smaller the light

amount is, the larger the output voltage is.

The value is checked with the HELP 13.

* Adjustment of end mark PCB unit

 Adjust the HELP mode H-13 so the difference

between the maximum value of the black level and

the white level becomes a maximum.HELP mode H-13  \ see p.252

HELP mode H-13  \ see p.252

Description

The end marks are located at a fixed distance

relative to the master; as the master is being fed,

the end mark sensor senses master condition and

the end marks by means of intensity of reflected

light.

(2) End Mark Sensor

End mark

End mark sensor

Circuit

23S0219

23S0327E

2Value of the HELP mode H-13

Black level maximum

White level 5 Black level maximum -10

Page 68: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 68/30371

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

1. Master Setting Error Detection

Operation

In platemaking, the end mark sensor uses amount of reflected light to detect presence or absence of a master

on the transfer path. Then the following displays and operations are performed:

2When a master setting error is detected, "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed and printing is not processed.

2"MASTER SET MISS" is only cleared by opening and closing the top cover.

(It is not cleared by turning the power off.)

2Printing is not performed but platemaking is only performed when the display is cleared after "MASTER

SET MISS" is displayed. (Because the master is not attached to the drum.)

Timing

(1) While platemaking is being processed, the reflection light amount does not turn to be in a white level.

(2) When platemaking process is finished (before printing process), the reflection light amount is in a white

level.

MIN

MAX

HELP 13

Display value

Smaller

Larger

   R  e   f   l  e  c   t   i  o  n

   l   i  g   h   t  a  m  o  u  n   t

White level top limit

Black level maximun 10

Black level top limit

00

63

Timing

When it is considered that the end mark is read under the following conditions, "ROLL-MASTER END" is

displayed.

qWhile the master is rolling up to the drum during platemaking, the following is checked.

wWhen the master passes under the end mark sensor, the amount of reflected light is read.

e If the following conditions are met, it is considered as master end.

Maximum Minimum 10 and Maximum white level top limit

2. Master End Detection

Operation

The end mark is printed on the area about 1 m from the end of the master.

2When the end mark is detected, "ROLL-MASTER END" is displayed.

2When "ROLL-MASTER END" is displayed, plate-making is not performed next.

Page 69: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 69/30372

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Master position sensor

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN2-281

2

3 -30

Green

Red

Blue

Green -29

5V5V

05V Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

5

6

7

(3) Master Position Sensor

Reflection light amount

The larger the reflection light amount is, the

smaller the output voltage is. The smaller the light

amount is, the larger the output voltage is.

The value is checked with the HELP 13.

Description

The master position sensor is located at a fixed

distance relative to the master. By means of reflected light, this sensor senses the presence of 

the master on the master travel path, and controls

its attachment position. If the intensity of the

reflected light does not reach the "white" level

(which indicates presence of the master) a single

time during platemaking, "RESET MAST. ROLL" is

displayed.

Circuit

HELP mode H-13  \ see p.252

Master

Master position sensor23S0220

23S0328E

Page 70: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 70/30373

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Description

Completed, the stepping motor for platemaking and the drum stops temporarily, the cutter motor is turned on

to drive the cutter and the master is cut.

   C   N   1  -   1   -   1

   4CN4-5

-6

Cutter motor (M5)Black

Red

Black

Red

1

2

Drive PCB unit

   C   N   1  -   1   9

  -   3   2

Main PCB unit

Circuit

(4) Cutter Unit

23S0322E

Page 71: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 71/30374

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

Operation

1) In the platemaking process, when the drum stops

in the master winding position, the master

feeding clutch comes on, so that sponge roller isdriven and feeds out the master by a fixed

amount.

2) The master clump opens and closes, to clump the

master.

3) When the master is wound onto the drum, the

master feed clutch turns off, leaving sponge

roller free to be turned by the master as it is

wound off the drum.

(5) Master Feeding Clutch(Electromagnetic clutch)

Description

Sponge roller is attached to the bottom section of the master conveyance way of the master feeding unit, and

is driven via the master feeding clutch (CL1) by the platemaking motor. The rotation of sponge roller is

controlled with the master feeding clutch ON / OFF.

   C   N   1  -   1   -   1

   4CN4-3

-4

Master feeding clutch (CL1)

Black

White

Brown

White

Brown

White

1

2

1

2

Drive PCB unit

   C   N   1  -   1   9

  -   3   2

Main PCB unit

24V

Circuit

63S00217

63S00218

63S00219

Master feeding clutch

Sponge roller

Master tip end

Master clump

Drum

B mode

C mode

B mode

23S0323E

Page 72: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 72/303

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

75

When the document receiving tray is closed, the switch is pressed; OPEN.

When the tray is open, the actuator is released; the switch is turned to CLOSE.

Description

Opening and closing of the document receiving tray is detected by the document receiving tray open / close

detection SW (MS3). This machine does not work (except for the master setting SW and the drum rotationSW) unless the tray is closed firmly. The machine stops immediately when the tray is open. (after finishing 

platemaking if platemaking is being performed.)If the document receiving tray open is detected."DOC. TRAY

OPEN" is displayed.

2When the document receiving tray is opened

2When the document receiving tray is closed

Document receiving tray open / close switch (MS3)

Main PCB Unit

Pink

Pink

CN2-14

-15

5V

5V0

When the tray is closed : 0V

When the tray open : 5V

Circuit

Operation

(6) Document Receiving Tray (Top Cover) Open / Close Detection

Document receiving tray

(Top cover)

Actuator is pressed

Actuator isreleased

Connector switch

23S0311E

Page 73: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 73/30376

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

When the drum stops at the plate detachment position and the master clump which clumps the master tip

end is opened (C mode), the pulling roller on the rolling section of the master ejection box pulls the master tip

end into the box inside, and the master is rolled up to the core.

If no core is installed, or when the master is fully wound onto the core, the core full switch (MS8) is

mechanically actuated, and the message "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" appears on the operation panel LCD panel.

Drive PCB unit

Main PCB unit

PinkBlue

Blue

Blue

Blue

Pink

Green

Light blue

Brown

Black

Green

Lightblue

Orange

Orange

Gray

Gray

Rollup motor

Jam sensor

photo-receing PCB

Jam sensorphoto-emitting PCB

Master ejection sensor

photo-emitting PCB

Core full switch

Master ejection sensor

photo-receing PCB

2

1

2

1

2

1

1

2

1

2

5

6

CN4-13

CN10-18

-14

-19

-20

-21

-22

-23

-1

-2

5V5V

5V

1

2

34

-24

-25

5V

12

2. Circuit

1. Description

Master Ejection Section

Pulling roller

Plate detachmentposition

Master ejectionsensor photo-emitting PCB

Masterejection box

Core full switch

Core

Roll up motor

Master ejection sensorphoto-receiving PCB

JAM sensor photo-emitting PCB

23S0264

23S0324E

23S0311

Page 74: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 74/30377

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

2. Rotation Control of the Roll-up MotorIf the roll-up motor is kept rotating when the master tip end is pulled to the ejection box in the plate

detachment process, the drum is actuated by the master and the stop position slips. To prevent this, the

roll-up motor is stopped when the master is detected by the master ejection sensor. (If the master is not

detected by the master ejection sensor, the Roll-up motor is stopped by the timer.)

(1) Master Ejection Sensor

Description

Photo-emission from the master ejection sensor isreceived on the master ejection sensor, and the

sensor detects with the photo strength whether the

master is pulled to the master ejection box.

Photo-receiving amount is checked with the

HELP5.

1. Master Ejection Error Detection

Operation

While one platemaking is being processed, the difference of photo-receiving amount is less than 8 by checking 

with the HELP5, which is determined as an master ejection error. The following display and operation are

shown.

2"MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed on the error display panel and printing is not processed.

2"MAST. EJECT ERROR" is cleared with the ALL CLEAR key , STOP key or by performing 

platemaking / printing.

2 A plate ejection error is not detected for one platemaking soon after a plate ejection error or master setting 

error is detected.

¡If incorrect sensing occurs due to sensor malfunction, etc., HELP32can be used to

prohibit plate ejection error sensing.

IMPORTANT :

Smaller Larger

Photo-receiving amount

3. Function of Parts

HELP mode H-32  \ see p.271

HELP mode H-05  \ see p.244

HELP mode H-05  \ see p.244

2HELP mode H-05 value

00

63

Timing

If the variation in the amount of light received by

the master ejection sensor during the making of 1

plate is less than a certain level (8 in the HELP5

display value), a plate ejection error is deemed tohave occurred.

2HELP mode H-05 value

Value without master : the photo receiving amount ofthe plate ejection sensor at the position where the firstpaper jam is detected after starting platemaking.

00

Threshold value

63

Threshold value :Value without master + 8

Time

Page 75: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 75/30378

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

1) When platemaking starts, the drum unit rotates

from the stop position to the opening / closing 

lever section (master detachment position) and it

stops temporarily. (B mode)

1. DescriptionThe master clump on the drum unit is opened or closed by the two opening / closing levers' rotation operation.

The opening / closing levers (one for the master attachment position, and the other for the master detachmentposition) are on the master clump opening / closing section on the main body rear side.

The master clump is opened or closed during platemaking. Opening / closing operation is as follows:-

5) Rotate the drum, to wind the master onto it.

4) Open and close the master clump to have it grip

the leading edge of the used master.

3) Close the master clump, rotate the drum again

and stop the drum at the next opening / closing lever section (master attachment position).

2) Open the master clump to have the used master

tip end gripped by the plate ejection unit.

Master Clump Opening / Closing Section

Master clump opening / closing lever(Plate attachment position) Master clump opening / 

closing section

23S0265

Drum unit

Master clump opening / closing lever(Plate detachment position)

Page 76: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 76/30379

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

The following is the structure of the master clump opening / closing section viewed with the rear cover opened.

The rotation stop position of the master clump opening / closing lever is determined by the clump motor and

two cams. There are 3 rotation stop positions: A mode, B mode and C mode. Their functions are as follows:-

(1) Structure

2. Operation of Master Clump Open / Close Lever

The drawing below is a section through the machine's interior, viewed from the control side.

Master clump opening / closing lever

Master clump opening / closing section

2A mode 2B mode 2C mode

Clump motor

B mode adjusting cam

Plate attachment position

Drum

Plate detachment position

A / C mode adjusting camB mode sensor

A / C mode sensor

Master clump opening / closing lever

Master clump

23S0266

Page 77: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 77/30380

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

(2) Plate Attachment / Detachment Operation

Page 78: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 78/30381

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

(3) Clump Opening / Closing Lever

Position (A / B / C Mode)

Mode Photointerrupter stop position / state of sensor Functions

In the normal state or during printing, the

master clump opening / closing lever turns

out from the master clump opening / 

closing lever.A

mode

B

mode

C

mode

The master clump opening / closing lever

pinch the master clump opening / closing 

arm.

The master clump is open. This state

occurs when the master is attached or

detached.

B mode sensor(PS4)

B mode sensor(PS4)

B mode sensor(PS4)

A / C mode sensor (PS3)

A / C mode sensor (PS3)

A / C mode sensor (PS3)

Photo-interruptinggPhoto-passing orPhotopassinggPhoto-interrupting

Photo-passing

Photo-interrupting

Photo-interrupting

Photo-passing

Photo-passing

Page 79: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 79/30382

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

The mode is detected under the following conditions

2A mode

When the B mode sensor (PS4) is photointerrupted, the A / C mode sensor (PS3) detects the edge of 

photointerrupting  f photopasing.

*With the power ON, the A mode is determined when the B mode sensor is in the photointerrupting state

and the A/C mode sensor is in the photopassing state. If not in the A mode with the power ON, the

master clump opening / closing lever rotates to the B mode and stops. When the lever stops at the

B mode, the drum rotates with the drum rotation switch and returns to the A mode at the stop position.

2B mode

When the A/C mode sensor is photointerrupted, the B mode sensor detects the edge of photointerrupting  /

 /photopassing or photopassing - photointerrupting.

2C mode

When the B mode sensor is photopassing, the A/C mode sensor detects the edge of photointerrupting   f

photopassing.

(1) A / B / C Mode Sensor

B mode sensor(PS4)

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

-91

2

3 -11

Green -10

5V5V

0

A/C mode sensor(PS3)

Red

Blue

CN10-31

2

3 -5

Orange -4

5V5V

0

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

   C   N   1  -   1   -   1

   4

CN4-15

-16

Clump motor (M3)

Black

Brown

Yellow

Orange

2

1

Drive PCB unit

   C   N   1  -   1   9

  -   3   2

Circuit

Operation / Sequence

3. Function of Parts

23S0329E

Page 80: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 80/30383

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.2

4. Returning Operation Flowchart When the Power Is Cut Off Accidentally

The machine returns to the initial state automatically when the power is turned off mistakenly during 

processing platemaking, plate-detaching and plate-attaching simultaneously or when the power returns after

it is interrupted.

Power ON

Detachment/attachment process

"PLEASE WAIT" display

Attachment/detachmentoperation continues

"MASTER SET MISS"displayed?

Open the document receiving tray

Remove the mis-set master

Close the document receiving tray

Standby

OK monitor lights outInitial desplay

Is the state the sameas the previous state(before the poweris turned OFF)?

Process other thandetachment/attachment

"PLEASE WAIT" lights out

no

Power ON

yes

Page 81: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 81/30384

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

1. DescriptionFeeding of the paper is performed by the paper separator (employing the center separation method) and paper

feed roller (there is no corner finger). Elevation of the feed tray is powered by the elevator motor. Paper fed by

the paper separator and paper feed roller is fed further by the timing roller and guide roller to the point

where its leading edge is sandwiched between the drum and the press roller. Then the pression of the timing 

roller and guide roller is released (by moving the guide roller upward several mm), so that the paper is fed

through at a speed equal to the circumferential speed of the drum and press roller. The press roller sensor

senses the paper feed condition; if a feed error occurs, the message “PAPER LEFT JAM” is displayed. For

details, see “1.Paper Jam Detection Timing” in chapter 2 (n Paper ejection section).  \See page 109

cPaper feed section

Paper

Drum

23S0274

Paper separator

Paper feed roller

Elevator motor

Feed traySupplemental paper tray

Timing roller

Press roller

Guide roller

P roll sensorLPU(Long Paper Unit)

DP-23S

Page 82: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 82/303

Paper feed roller

Timing roller

Paper feed segment

Timing segment

Pinion gear

Paper feed roller

85

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

When the main motor turns, the paper feed cam rotates, causing the paper feed segment and timing segment

to execute the reciprocating motion shown below, which turns the pinion gear.

2. Operation

(1) Rotation of the Paper Feed Roller and

Timing Roller

23S0223

Page 83: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 83/30386

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

The paper feed roller is driven by the main motor via the timing belt and the paper feed clutch. The rotational

timing depends on the ON/OFF state of the paper feed clutch and is controlled by the program.

(2) Paper Feed Roller Drive

Paper feed roller

Main motorPaper feed clutch

Timing roller

23S0279

Page 84: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 84/30387

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

Timing roller is actuated to rotate by the pinion gear and spring clutch. When the paper feed cam rotates, the

reciprocating motion of the timing roller segment is transmitted to the pinion gear, and the spring clutch

works to rotate the Timing roller in the direction of conveyance.

(3) Driving of the Timing Roller

Timing roller

Paper feed cam

Spring clutch

Spring clutch

Pinion gear

Paper feed segment

23S0275

Page 85: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 85/30388

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

23S0286

23S0287

 After the Press roller is pressed to the drum, the printing paper is gripped firmly with the drum and Press

roller, the Guide roller is released from the Timing roller. This is called "escaped". Escape timing is within a

period when the printing paper is conveyed about 10 mm after it is gripped with the drum and Press roller.

(4) Escape the Guide Roller

¡When the timing is too late, the printing paper is gripped at two places too long. Thus

master elongation and slippage occur.

¡On the contrary, when the timing is too early, the printing paper is not gripped at all, and it

is not well settled. Thus creasing of paper and dispersion of the printing position occurs.

IMPORTANT :

Escape cam

Escape cam

Timing roller

Timing roller

Escape lever

Guide roller

Press roller

Guide roller

Drum

Paper

DP-21S/L

Drum

Press roller

about10mm

about

10mm

Page 86: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 86/303

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

89

23S0289

23S0290

 After the Press roller is pressed to the drum, the printing paper is gripped firmly with the drum and Press

roller, the Guide roller is released from the Timing roller. This is called "escaped". Escape timing is within a

period when the printing paper is conveyed about 10 mm after it is gripped with the drum and Press roller.

(4) Escape the Guide Roller

¡When the timing is too late, the printing paper is gripped at two places too long. Thus

master elongation and slippage occur.

¡On the contrary, when the timing is too early, the printing paper is not gripped at all, and it

is not well settled. Thus creasing of paper and dispersion of the printing position occurs.

IMPORTANT :

Escape cam

Escape cam

Timing roller

Timing roller

Escape lever

Guide

roller

Press roller

Guide roller

Drum

Paper

DP-23S

Drum

Press roller

about10mm

about

10mm

Escape motor

Escape sensor

Sensor plate

Escape motor

* DP-21S / 21L : Option

Page 87: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 87/30390

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

The “paper feed length” is the length by which the paper feed roller feeds out the print paper. When the paper

feed roller feeds out the print paper, the guide roller is pressed against the timing roller and does not rotate;

as a result, the paper arches up between the paper separator and the timing roller, since the distance between

these two items is only 80mm, while the length by which the paper is fed out from the paper feed roller is

95mm. This arching has the effect of correcting any skewing of the paper (as the leading edge is held firm

between the guide and timing rollers). It also has the effect of lessening the load on the timing roller when it

feeds the paper through, thus minimizing slippage.

For feed amount, the leading edge of the paper is detected by the loop sensor and paper feed is controlled by

program.

¡If paper feed length is too large: the arching dimension will be too large, and if the paper is

of a very stiff type, it will buckle up between the paper feed roller and the paper feed inlet

(upper), causing a PAPER JAM error ("PAPER LEFT JAM").

¡If paper feed length is too small: the arching dimension will be too small, so that arching

will be unable to correct skewing of the paper, and skewing and wrinkling will be liable tooccur. Furthermore, the slippage that occurs when the timing roller feeds the paper

through will be very large, resulting in printing position errors.

IMPORTANT :

(5) Paper Feed Length

Cam follower

Paper feed cam

Paper feed roller

Paper

Guide roller

Paper feed sensor

Paper separator

Timing roller

23S0260

Page 88: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 88/30391

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

The printing position is adjusted by changing the

timing of the paper toward the drum with the

PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT , key

on the control panel.

Description

When the PRINTING POSITION ADJUSTMENT

, key on the control panel is pressed, the link

cam is driven by the motor. As the link cam moves,

the cam follower position (bearing) from the paper

feed cam changes. Accordingly drive timing for the

timing roller can be changed.

2Press the key ;

Cam follower moves in the direction of : e Drive timing of the timing roller becomes earlier.

Paper timing becomes earlier, and the picture image moves backward.

2Press the key ;

Cam follower moves in the direction of : b Drive timing of the timing roller becomes later.

Paper timing becomes later, and the picture image moves forward.

(1) Printing Position Adjusting Mechanism

¡Pressing makes cam follow-

er move in the b direction

¡Pressing makes cam follow-

er move in the e direction

Timing roller

Link cam

Printing position motor

Standard position sensor

Paper feed cam

Top and bottomlimit sensor

Cam follower

23S0258

3. Functions of parts

STD 

Page 89: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 89/30392

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

Standard position sensor(PS11)

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

-2912

3 -31

White -30

5V5V

0

Top and bottom limit sensor(PS10)

Red

Blue

CN10-261

2

3 -28

Gray -27

5V5V

0

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

5V Photo passing:0V

Photointerrupting:5V

   C   N   1  -   1   -   1

   4

CN4-1

-2

Printing position motor (M6)

Black

Brown

Orange

Yellow

2

1

Drive PCB unit

   C   N   1  -   1   9

  -   3   2

Circuit

Operation

Top and bottom limit of print position is detected by the top and bottom limit sensor and the standard position

sensor.

The center position is detected by the standard position sensor.

2 photopassing, photointerrupting

The printing position is between the standard position and bottom limit.

2 photopassing, the edge of photointerrupting - photopassing

is detected

The printing position is at the bottom limit.

2 photointerrupting, photointerrupting

The printing position is between the standard position and the top limit.

2 photointerrupting, the edge of photointerrupting - photopassing

is detected

The printing position is at the top limit.

Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:

Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:

Limit sensor:Standard position sensor:

Limit sensor:Standard sensor:

Operation with the Power ON

The printing position returns to the standard

position by operating with the power ON,

depending on the sensor state as follows.

2When positioned between the standard position

and the bottom limit:

Rotate the printing position motor normally (CW)

to return the printing position to the standard.

2When positioned between the standard position

and the top limit:

Rotate the printing position motor reversely

(CCW) to return the printing position to the stan-

dard.

23S0330E

Page 90: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 90/30393

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

Description

Operation

View from

Pinch leverDrum

P roll sensor

Press roller

Timing roller

Guide roller

Signal lever

(2) Signal Lever

The signal lever is positioned at the back of the Guide roller / Timing roller. Whether the paper is fed by the

Timing roller is detected mechanically.

The pinch lever is attached to the other end of the shaft to which the signal lever is attached. As the signal

lever is jumped by the paper, the pinch lever also jumps. Accordingly the Press roller is out of control and

rises. The above operation keeps the drum from dirts as the Press roller is in contact with the drum when the

paper is not fed. As the Press roller sensor detects rising of the Press roller, Whether the paper is fed from the

paper feed section to the printing section normally is detected indirectly.

Paper

Signal lever

Press roller

P roll sensor

Timing roller

Guide roller

Press leverPinch lever

A

23S0277

23S0257

Page 91: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 91/30394

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

(3) Feed Tray (Elevator) Upper Limit Sensor

Description

Circuits

Operation

The feed tray (elevator) upper limit sensor senses decrease of the paper pile, and the upper limit position of 

the feed tray. It does so by detecting the up/down motion of the paper feed shaft.

Sensing of feed tray upper limit

2When the feed tray rises, the paper in it presses the paper feed roller upward, making the paper feed shaft

lever (photointerrupter) rotate upwards about its fulcrum, until it no longer obstructs the sensor’s light

beam. Restoration of the sensor’s light beam signals that the paper tray has reached the upper limit, and

triggers stopping of the feed tray’s rise.

Sensing of paper decrease

2 As printing progresses and the paper decreases, the paper feed roller gradually descends, until it obstructs

the sensor’s light beam. When this happens, the feed tray is raised until the light beam is restored.

If the light beam is not restored within about 30 seconds of the sending of the RAISE FEED TRAY

command, error E002 (elevator lock) is displayed.

Feed tray (elevator) upper limit sensor

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN2-221

2

3 -24

Light green -23

5V5V

05V Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

23S0301E

23S0224

Paper feed roller

Paper tray upper limit sensor

Paper

Fulcrum

Paper feed shaft lever

Page 92: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 92/30395

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

(4) Feed Tray (Elevator) Lower Limit Switch

Description

Circuits

Operation

This is a micro switch (SM6) that senses the lower limit position of the feed tray.

When the feed tray rises, the bracket disengages from the switch and the switch closes. When the feed tray

descends to its lower limit position, the bracket engages the switch’s actuator, opening the switch.

If the switch does not open within about 30 seconds of the sending of the LOWER FEED TRAY command, error

E002 (elevator lock) is displayed.

Feed tray (elevator) lower limit switch

Lower limit (PUSH) : OPEN

Main PCB Unit

Light blue

Light blue

CN2-20

-21

5V

5V0

23S0302E

Bracket

Actuator

23S0114

Feed tray lowerlimit switch

2

Lower limit position

Page 93: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 93/30396

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.2

(5) Paper Sensor

Description

Circuits

Operation

Senses presence/absence of paper in the feed tray. When the paper in the tray runs out, the message "SET

PRINT PAPER" is displayed and printing stops.

When there is no paper, the lever moves away and the sensor opens. When paper is placed inside, the lever

presses the actuator and the sensor closes. When an absence of paper is detected, the message "SET PRINT

PAPER" is displayed on the operation panel.

2When absence of paper is sensed, platemaking, printing and test printing are not possible.

2If the paper runs out during printing, "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed on the operation panel, printing is

stopped, and the feed tray descends to its lower limit position.

2If the paper runs out during platemaking, operation continues until the end of the platemaking process,

then operation stops (without proceeding to the printing process), and the feed tray descends to its lower

limit position.

Paper sensor

Closed when paper present

Open when paper absent

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN2-251

2

3 -27

Purple -26

5V5V

05V Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

¡When there is no paper :

23S0226

23S0303E

Photointerrupting

Photopassing

Actuator

Paper sensor

¡When there is paper placed :

Page 94: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 94/30397

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

vDrum Driving Section

1. Description

Encoder sensor

Encoder

Main motor

Drum gear

Drum home / jam detectionposition sensor

(P roll sensor)

23S0248

Master attachment / detachment position sensor

Page 95: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 95/30398

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

(1) Home Position / Jam Detection

Position Sensor

2. Function of Parts

The home position / jam detection position sensor detects the drum home position and jam detection position.

2The drum home position is the position where the drum stops at the same time when a beep sounds after

the jog switch (drum rotator switch) is kept pressing.

2The jam detection position is the timing to check paper jamming in the paper ejection section.

2Paper jamming in the paper ejection section is checked in the above timing with the jam sensor (photo-

receiving) and P roll sensor.

Operation

The home position / jam detection position sensor is positioned while the drum is rotating as follows:-

2The home position is detected with the edge of photointerrupting / photopassing.

2The jam detection position is detected with the edge of photopassing / photointerrupting.

Drum home position /

jam detection position sensor (PS5)

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN10-61

2

3 -8

Yellow -7

5V5V

05V Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

Circuit

23S0249

23S0304E

Drum home/jam detectionposition sensor

Drum home/jam detectionposition edge

Jam detection position edge

Page 96: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 96/30399

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

(2) Master Attachment / Detachment

Position Sensor

The master attachment / detachment position sensor detects the drum stop position when the plate is

attached or detached. It also detects the speed reducing timing for stopping at the printing speed and for

pressing the JOG switch (drum rotator switch).

Operation

The following is the state of the master attachment / detachment position sensor while the drum is rotating.

2The master detachment position is detected with the edge of photopassing  f photointerrupting.

2The master attachment position is detected with the edge of photointerrupting  f potopassing.

2The drum speed is reduced to the slow (before-stop) speed at the plate detachment position before the drum

stops.

Master attachment / detachment

position sensor (PS6)

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN10-121

2

3 -14

Purple -13

5V5V

05V Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

Circuit

23S0305E

23S0250

Master detachment position

Master attachment position

Master detachmentposition edge

Master attachmentposition edge

Master attachment / detachment position sensor

Page 97: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 97/303100

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

Description

The drum rotates as long as the JOG switch (drum rotator switch) is pressed (within one rotation) and stops

at the stop position with a beep.

In the normal state, the drum rotates (within one

rotation) when the JOG switch (drum rotator

switch) is kept pressed and the drum stops at the

stop position, reducing the speed to the slow

(before-stop) speed at the first plate detachment

position.

When the P roll sensor is in the photopassing 

state (P roll ON) at the first plate detachment

position, the drum passes the stop position

without reducing the speed.

JOG switch (drum rotator switch) (SW3)

Main PCB Unit

Purple

Purple

CN2-8

-9

5V

5V0

Circuit

(3) JOG Switch (Drum Rotator Switch)

JOG switch(Drum rotator switch)

JOG switch (drum rotator switch) (SW3)

23S0014

23S0306E

2When the JOG Switch (Drum Rotator Switch) Is

Pressed Down

Sequence of Operation

Page 98: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 98/303101

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

(4) Control of the Main Motor

Encoder sensor (PS7)

DC24V

Main motor (M1)

Main motor PCB Unit

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

Red

Brown

Brown

Blue

Blue

Blue

CN1-1

CN4-1

-2

-3

-4

CN5-1

-2

1

2

3 -3

Gray -2

5V5V

05V

Photopass : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

   M  a   i  n   4

   M  a   i  n   3

   M  a   i  n   2

   M  a   i  n   1

   I  n   t  e  r   l  o  c   k  m  o  n   i   t  o  r

   E  n  c  o   d  e  r   d   i  v   i   d   i  n  g

 

   5   V

   G   N   D

   C   N   3  -   1

   C   N   1   1  -   2   1

  -   2   2

  -   2   3

  -   2   4

  -   2   5

  -   2   6

  -   2   7

  -   2   8

  -   2   -   3   -   4   -   5   -   6   -   7   -   8

   B   l   u

   e

   R   e   d    O   r   a

   n   g   e

   W   h   i   t   e

   B   l   a   c   k

   G   r   a

   y

   L   i   g   h   t   b   l   u   e

   P   u   r

   p   l   e

Circuit

23S0307E

Page 99: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 99/303102

v Drum Driving Sectionchap.2

1. Rotation Speed Control by Encoder Sensor

The encoder sensor detects the main motor

rotation. The main motor PCB Unit controls the

number of main motor rotations with the encoder

sensor signal. The encoder sensor signal is

transmitted to the main PCB Unit as encoderdividing signal (8 dividings). The number of main

motor rotations is checked with the HELP01.

2. Selecting the Speed

The speed is selected with the main 1 - 4 on the main PCB Unit.

The following are the speed depending on the pin state.

Slow 2 is applied to accelerating only. it is not used to reduce the speed. All the speeds

including slow 1 are accelerating speeds. if the slow 1 is not operated, all the other speeds

are not operated.

IMPORTANT :

CN 11-25 Main 1

H

SLOW 1 SLOW 2 JOG1st

SPEED2nd

SPEED3rd

SPEEDSTOP

-26 Main 2

-27 Main 3

-28 Main 4

L

L

L

L

L

L

H

L

H

L

H

L

L

H

H

L

L

H

L

L

H

L

L

L

HELP mode H-01  \ see p.238

Page 100: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 100/303103

b Press Sectionchap.2

bPress Section

1. Description

(1) Press Roller Timing & Printing Area

DescriptionIn this machine, the master is rolled up to the

drum, ink is transferred to the drum and the

printing paper is pressed to the drum by the press

roller to print.

Printing is performed on only the sections that

meet the following requirements.

1) The sections of the master on which holes are

made by processing platemaking. (platemaking area)

2) The hole sections of the drum.3) The section of the drum pressed with the press

roller. (the area pressed ON)

When the pressed-on position is 0 under the

normally adjusted conditions, relations among 

1), 2) and 3) are as follows*-

Drum gear

Press roller

Press lever

P roll sensor

(mm)

DP-23S DP-21L DP-21S

360 356

315.3365.3

355 300

Press ON length

Drum hole section length

Printing area length

23S0251

DP-21L/23S : 365.3mmDP21S : 315.3mm

   D   P  -   2   1   L   /   2   3   S  :   2   5   0  m  m

   D   P   2   1   S  :   2   1   0  m  m

Center of themaster clump shaft

Bottom end of thehole section

Page 101: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 101/303104

b Press Sectionchap.2

The press roller is ON (the press roller is pressed to the drum) or OFF by operating the press lever up and

down with the cam inside the drum gear.

Press roller : OFF Press roller : ON

Do not press off later than the hole

section end position since ink

seeps from the bottom end of the

master.

IMPORTANT :

 Adjusting the printing area means that the cam

curve goes up and down as shown in the figure. The

timing of drum ON / OFF varies depending on the

cam curve`s up and down. The ON position is before

the drum hole section, so the printing area is not

influenced. (Do not shorten the printing area length

as it is influenced.) The OFF position is onlychanged and the printing area is adjusted.

Drum

Drum gear

Cam

Press roller

Press lever

Drum

Drum gear

Cam

Press rollerPress lever

23S0252

Press OFF position Press ON position

Drum hole sectionend

Drum hole sectionstart

Printingarea

Printing area

Page 102: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 102/303105

b Press Sectionchap.2

(1) Press Roller (P Roll) Sensor

The P roll sensor detects up and down of the press roller.

The press roller only ascends when the paper is fed from the paper feed section by the pinch lever. The P roll

sensor also is used to know whether the paper is fed.

Operation

The P roll sensor position varies depending on the press roller position as follows:-

• When the press roller is OFF (DOWN) : photointerrupting

• When the press roller is ON (UP) : photopassing

Press roller : OFF Press roller : ON

Press roll limit sensor(PS8)

Main PCB Unit

Red

Blue

CN10-151

2

3 -17

Light blue -16

5V5V

05V Photopassing : 0V

Photointerrupting : 5V

Circuit

2. Function of Parts

Drum Drum

Press roller

Press lever

Press roller

Press lever

Pinch leverPinch lever

P roll sensor:photopassing

P roll sensor:photointerru

pting

23S0253

23S0308E

Page 103: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 103/303106

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2

nPaper Ejection Section

1. Description

In the paper ejection section the printed paper is removed from the drum and is ejected to the print tray.

Drum

Main motor

Paper stripper finger

Paper ejection clutch

Paper ejection belt

Paper ejection fun

23S00288

Drum

Main motor

Paper stripper finger

Paper ejection belt

Paper ejection fun

DP-23S

DP-21S/L

Page 104: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 104/303107

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2

2. Functions of Parts

Mechanical Structure and Operation

In addition to the paper stripper finger installed in the center, there are two sub paper remover fingers on

both sides. There is an air diffuser on the tip of the finger. Compressed air transmitted from the air pump is

blowed out of this hole to detach the tip end of the paper from the drum.

To remove the paper from the drum firmly, the gap between the tip of finger and the drum surface and

between the tip of finger and the corner of the master clump are adjusted as follows:-

Air pump

Sub paperstripper fingerPaper

stripper fingerSub paperstripper finger

Drumsurface

Approx0.5mm

Paper stripperfinger

(1) Paper Stripper Finger

23S0247

23S0278

Page 105: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 105/303108

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2

Description

The jam sensor photo-receiving element is installed on the paper ejection fan unit and detects whether the

paper is ejected normally. When it is detected that the paper is not ejected normally, "PAPER RIGHT JAM"

(ejection side) is displayed on the error display panel on the control panel.

Operation

The Jam photo-emitting PCB is installed in the master ejection box, and the photo-receiving PCB in the paper

ejection fan unit. HIGH with the optical path interrupted. LOW with the optical path passing.

There are two cases of interruption; interrupted by the paper and the master ejection box is open.

 

Master ejection sensor

photo-emitting PCB

Jam sensor

photo-emitting PCB

Blue

Jam sensor

photo-recieving PCBCN10-18

-19

-25

-24

-23

Main PCB Unit

Blue

Blue

Gray

Pink

Pink

CN10-225

1

2

1

2

2

1

4

5V

5V

5V

3

6

Circuit

(2) Jam Sensor

23S0309E

23S0255

Paper ejection fun unit

Master ejection box

Jam sensor(Photo-emitting)

Jam sensor(Photo-receiving)

Page 106: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 106/303109

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2

2Paper jamming on the ejection side

JAM1: The bottom end of the paper is not ejected.

When the jam sensor (light-emitting and light-receiving) is interrupted at the timing of jam detection

position edge (photopassing  \ photointerrupting) of the drum home / jam detection position sensor

PS5.

JAM2: The tip end of the paper is not ejected.

When the JAM sensor is not interrupted at all while the P roll sensor is in the state of photopassing 

(pressed ON).

JAM (stop): When the JAM sensor is interrupted as the master ejection box is open when the machine stops.

The display is cleared when the sensor is in the state of photopassing.

2Paper jamming on the feeder side

JAM3: The paper does not pass the signal lever though the paper is fed. The P roll sensor is not in the state

of photopassing when the drum rotates twice after the paper feed solenoid is ordered ON.

1. Paper Jam Detection Timing

Description

Paper jamming is divided into two types: "PAPER RIGHT JAM" (ejection side) and "PAPER LEFT JAM"(feeder

side). Paper jamming is detected under the following conditions. When paper jamming is detected, "PAPER

JAM" is displayed on the error display panel on the control panel, and the machine stops printing operation.

The display is cleared by removing the cause of paper jam and pressing the STOP key or by restarting 

printing.

Sequence of Operation

 A4 LG B4 A4 LG B4 A4 LG B4

23S0256

Jam sensor(Photo-emitting)

Signal lever

P roll sensor

Master attachment/detachmentposition sensor

Jam sensor(Photo-receiving)

Drum home/jam detection position sensor

DP-23S

Page 107: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 107/303110

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.2

(3) Paper aligning mechanism

Description

Paper can be aligned neatly by considering the ejection angle.

 Adjustments should be made in accordance with paper thickness.

For thinner paper: Set the lever in the upper position.

For thicker paper: Set the lever in the lower position.

* Although the lever is usually set at the intermediate position for paper of normal thickness (65g/m 2), the

lever position should be adjusted depending on the condition of the paper.

Lever

Thinner paper

Ticker paper

23S0285

Normal(65g/ )

Page 108: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 108/303111

m Drum Sectionchap.2

mDrum Section

The ink control section is in the drum unit. The ink control section is supplied with ink in the ink pack

attached to the drum unit by the motor. The ink control section has an ink detection function, and is always

supplied with a fixed amount of ink. Printing darkness is adjusted by changing the gap between the squeegee

roller and the ink roller. Five color inks are available: black, red, blue, green and brown. Perform color

printing to replace the drum unit for each color. (Press the drum rotation switch to the drum home position to

replace the drum unit.)

In this machine, whether there is a drum or not is detected. If the drum is not attached properly, it is taken as

"DRUM NOT SET", and "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed on the control panel.

Ink detection PCB unit

Ink motor

Ink pack

Squeegee roller

Ink roller

1. Description

Page 109: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 109/303112

m Drum Sectionchap.2

23V

23V

Drive PCB Unit

Orange

Pink

Blue

Brown

Black

Orange

Pink

Blue

Brown

Black

Brown

Black

Blue

Brown

Black

CN2-1

CN1-3

-1

-2

-2

-3

-4

-5

2

8

3

9

4

3

1

2

1

2

Ink detection PCB Unit

Ink motor (M7)

2. Circuit

23S0310E

Page 110: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 110/303113

m Drum Sectionchap.2

Description

The ink amount variation in the ink control section is read by the electric capacity variation between thedetection needles on the ink detection PCB Unit and the GND and the ink signal is output to the main PCB

Unit. The main PCB Unit controls the motor ON and OFF by this signal.

When NO INK continues while the drum rotates 20 times (the number of drum unit rotations; it varies

depending on the printing speed.*) during printing, it is determined that the ink pack is empty, "CHANGE

INK" is displayed and the machine stops printing.

(1) Ink Detection

3. Function of Parts

 \See page 115

Page 111: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 111/303

Page 112: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 112/303115

m Drum Sectionchap.2

2. "CHANGE INK" Display Timing

When HIGH (5V) is output by detecting ink while the drum continues to rotate 20 times (the number of 

rotations varies depending on the printing speed.*) during printing, it is detected that the ink pack is empty,

"CHANGE INK" is displayed on the error display, and printing stops. At the same time the power for the ink

motor is turned off.

*The drum rotates until "CHANGE INK" is displayed after HIGH is output from the ink detection PCB unit

during printing. The number of drum rotations varies depending on the printing speed as follows:-

Printing speed

Number of rotations

1

17

2

20

3

24

Page 113: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 113/303

Page 114: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 114/303117

m Drum Sectionchap.2

Description

The drum switch detects whether the drum is installed to the machine.

When it is detected that there is no drum installed, "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed on the error display panel

on the control panel the machine stops operation. When no drum is detected during operation, all the

operations stops emergently.

Operation

When the drum is attached to the main body, the cam unit covers the pin and is locked firmly. The difference

of the cam unit prevents the cam unit from being loosened due to the machine vibration.

When the pin is at the bottom of the cam unit difference, the drum SW is open as shown in the figure. When

the pin is over the cam unit difference, the drum SW is closed.

Drum switch (MS4)

Main PCB Unit

White

White

CN2-10

-11

5V

5V

0

Circuit

(3)Drum Switch

LeverLever

Switch

Pin

Cam unit

23S0280

2No drum2Drum installed

23S0331E

Page 115: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 115/303118

m Drum Sectionchap.2

Description

The front cover switch detects opening and closing of the front cover. "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed on

the error display panel on the control panel, when it is detected that the front cover is open. When the front

cover is open, platemaking and printing is not performed. When the front cover open is detected during 

printing, the machine stops immediately. (When the front cover open is detected during platemaking, the

machine stops before processing printing.)

Operation

When the front cover is closed, the lever presses the switch and is closed. When the front cover is open, the

lever is apart from the switch and is open.

Front cover switch (MS5)

Main PCB Unit

Light blue

Light blue

CN2-12

-13

5V

5V

0

Circuit

(4) Front Cover Open / Close Detection Switch

Switch

Switch Switch

Lever Lever

Front cover

23S0272

2When the front cover is open :2When the front cover is closed :

23S0332E

Page 116: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 116/303119

, Optionchap.2

When attaching the TAPE

CLUSTER, set the mode to the

HELP mode 28 with TAPE

CLUSTER.

(For further details, refer to the list

of the HELP modes. If it is not set,

the TAPE CLUSTER does not work.)

IMPORTANT :

2When the number of sets is input without a TAPE

CLUSTER (optional), the following is operated.

Printing stops at the timing of feeding tape, Press

the PRINT key again to start printing.

(Manual clustering)

Description

 A certain length of tape is fed and cut from the

TAPE CLUSTER to finish printing the number of 

sets in the cluster printing operation. The operation

is continued to process the number of sets.

*Printing does not stop when the tape runs out

during printing.

The number of sheets for 1 set to be processed is

1 - 9999 sheets. The number of sets for

1 classification to be processed is 1 - 99 sets.

Operation

1) The TAPE CLUSTER starts to feed the tape from the last 10 sheets for the set. A fixed length of the tape is

fed and is cut after completing printing the set amount.

This operation is repeated until the last set is processed.

The fed amount of tape is different between the large and small classifications. When all the sets for 1 clas-

sification are processed, the fed amount of tape is longer (large classification). When all the sheets for 1 set

are processed, the fed amount of tape is shorter (small classification).

Fed amount of tape for small classification: about 250mm (±15%)

Fed amount of tape for large classification: about 370mm (±15%)

2) When the number of sheets for the set is less then 10 sheets, the tape is fed at the same time when printing 

starts. When the number of sheets is printed before a fixed amount of tape is fed, printing for the next set

is discontinued until the tape is fed. (Paper feeding stops. The drum rotates at a low speed.)

,Option

(1) TAPE CLUSTER

HELP mode H-28  \ see p.267

Cluster tape TAPE CLUSTER

23S0028

Page 117: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 117/303120

Chapter 3 Mechanism

z Exterior.......................................................................122

(1) Removal of the Document Tray...........................122

(2) Removal of the ADF Front / Rear Cover.............122

(3) Removal of the Document Cover.........................122

(4) Removal of Main PCB Cover...............................123

(5) Removal of Battery PCB

Unit and Main PCB Unit.....................................123

(6) Removal of Front Cover.......................................124

(7) Removal of Control Panel....................................124

(8)Removal of Control Panel PCB ............................124

(9) Removal of LCD Panel........................................125

(10) Removal of Drive PCB Unit

and DC Regulated Power Supply ......................125

(11) Removal of Rear Cover ......................................126

(12) Removal of the Document Receiving Tray

(Top Cover)..........................................................126

x Scanner Section........................................................127

(1) Removal of ADF Cover ........................................127

(2) Removal of Document Sensor..............................127

(3) Removal of ADF Feed Roller ...............................128

(4) Removal of ADF Paper Separator Unit ..............128

(5) Removal of Scanner JAM Sensor

(Photo-receiving) .................................................129

(6) Removal of Timing Belt.......................................129

(7) Removal of Scanner Clutch .................................130

(8) Removal of ADF Cover Opening / 

Closing Switch......................................................130

(9) Removal of Scanner Stepping Motor ..................131

(10) Removal of Scanner Unit ..................................132

(11) Removal of Document Position Sensor.............132

(12) Removal of Inverter PCB Unit .........................133

(13) Removal of Lamp Unit ......................................134

c Platemaking / Master Feed and Ejection Section...135

Master Feed Section ...........................................135

(1) Removal of Cutter Unit .......................................135

(2) Removal of End Mark Sensor PCB Unit ............136

(3) Removal of Thermal Head...................................137

(4) Removal of Master Feed Unit .............................138(5)Removal of Master Feed Stepping Motor ............139

Master Ejection Section ......................................140

(1) Removal of Master Ejection Box .........................140

(2) Removal of Jam / Master Ejection Sensor

(Photo-emitting PCB Unit)..................................141

(3) Removal of Rollup Motor.....................................141

Master Clump opening/Closing Section ...........142

(1) Removal of Master Clump Opening / 

Closing Unit.........................................................142

(2) Removal of Clump Motor.....................................142

(3) Removal of Timing Belt.......................................143

Page 118: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 118/303121

3

v Paper Feed Section....................................................144

(1) Removal of Paper Sensor......................................144

(2) Removal of Elevator Lower Limit Switch ...........144

(3) Removal of Paper Feed Roller..............................145

(4) Removal of Paper Separator Unit........................145

(5) Removal of Paper Feed Clutch Unit ....................146

(6) Removal of Paper Feed Sensor.............................147

b Drum Driving Section ................................................148

(1) Removal of Sub-Frame .........................................148

(2) Removal of Drum Gear.........................................149

n Paper Ejection Section ..............................................150

(1) Removal of Paper Stripper Finger / 

Sub Paper Stripper Finger...................................150

(2) Removal of Paper Ejection Fan Unit ...................151

(3) Removal of Paper Ejection Belt ...........................152(4) Removal of Jam Sensor

(Photo-receiving PCB Unit)..................................152

m Drum Section .............................................................153

(1) Removal of Screen ...............................................153

(2) Removal of Master Clump....................................154

(3) Removal of Base Unit...........................................154

(4) Removal of Outer Frame (Right) Unit.................155

(5) Removal of Outer Frame (Left) Assy...................156

(6) Removal of Inner Frame ......................................157

(7) Removal of Ink Pump...........................................158

(8) Removal of Ink Motor...........................................158

(9) Removal of Ink Detection PCB Unit....................159

WARNING

¡Always remove the power cord plug from the outlet before

starting work.

Page 119: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 119/303

(2) Removal of ADF Front / Rear Cover

(1) Removal of Document Tray

122

z Exteriorchap.3

z Exterior

1) Remove the document tray.

2) Open the ADF cover.

3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

front cover.

4) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

rear cover.

(3) Removal of Document Cover

1) Carry out (1) and (2) above.2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

document cover.

1) Lift the document tray directly upward, andremove the document tray by pulling it off the

pins of the scanner unit.

23S0032

23S0033

23S0034

Document tray Pins

Screws

Screws

Screw

Documentcover

Screw

Front cover

Rear cover

ADF cover

Page 120: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 120/303123

z Exteriorchap.3

(4) Removal of Main PCB Cover

1) Carry out (1) through (3) above.

2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, then remove the

main PCB cover.

 \See page 122

(5) Removal of Battery PCB Unit and Main PCB Unit

1) Carry out (1) through (3) above.

 \See page 122

2) Remove the connectors:

¡ Battery PCB Unit: 1 connector

¡ Main PCB Unit: 11 connectors

3) Remove the mounting screws, and replace the

PCB units.

¡ Battery PCB Unit: 2 spacers

¡ Main PCB Unit: 4 screws

23S0035

Screws

Main PCBcover

Screws

23S0062

BatteryPCB unit

Screw Screw

ScrewScrews

Screw

Main PCB unit

WARNING

¡Always remove the power cord plug from

the outlet before replacing a PCB Unit.

Page 121: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 121/303

23S0056

124

z Exteriorchap.3

Screws

Front cover

1) Open the front cover, and take out the drum unit.

2) Open the document receiving tray and the

master ejection box.

3) Remove the 7 screws indicated, then remove the

front cover.

1) Remove the previously mentioned (3), (4), (6),

and (2) ADF cover (R).

2) Disconnect the connector.

3) Open the top cover.

4) Remove the two screws and carefully pull the

panel out, being careful to not damage the panel.

 \See page 122

1) Remove the preciously mentioned (6) and (7).

2) Pull out the stoppers on each side of the connetor

and detach the LCD code.

3) Remove the one screw and remove the bracket.4) Remove the 11 screws and remove the control

panel PCB.

(6) Removal of Front Cover

(7) Removal of Control Panel

(8) Removal of Control Panel PCB

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

23S0057

23S0058

Screw

Screw

Connector

Control panel

Stopper

Screws Screws

Connector

LCD cord

Brack-

Control panel PCB unit

Page 122: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 122/303

1) Remove the front cover.

2) Remove the connectors of.

¡ Drive PCB Unit (8 connectors)

¡ DC regulated power supply (3 connectors)

¡ Mini Drive PCB Unit (connector)

3) Remove the mounting screws, and replace the

PCB units.

¡ Drive PCB Unit:4 screws

 \See page 124

23S0063

125

z Exteriorchap.3

(9) Removal of LCD Panel

(10) Removal of Drive PCB Unit and DC

Regulated Power Supply

23S0059

Screw

Bracket

LCD panel

Connector

LCD cordStopper

Screw

1) Remove the previously mentioned (6) and (7).

2) Pull out the stoppers on each side of the connetor

and detach the LCD code.3) Remove the two screws and remove the LCD

panel.

Drive PCB unit

Screws

Screws

Screws

Regulated powersupply

Screws

WARNING

¡Always remove the power cord plug from

the outlet before replacing a PCB Unit.

DP-23S

Mini Drive PCBunit

DP-23S

Page 123: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 123/303126

z Exteriorchap.3

(11) Removal of Rear Cover

1) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

rear cover.

1) Open the document receiving tray.

2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

hinge.

3) Remove the rear cover.

4) Remove the screw indicated, then remove thebrackets.

5) Remove the document receiving tray.

23S0060

Screws

Rear cover

Screws

23S0061

Screw

Screws

Bracket

Document receivingtray(Top cover)

Hinge

(12) Removal of Document Receiving

Tray(Top cover)

Page 124: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 124/303127

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

(1) Removal of ADF Cover

1) Remove the ADF front / rear covers.

2) Remove the 2 screws.

3) Remove the screws on either side of the scanner

unit, and remove the hinges.

4) Remove the ADF cover.

 \See page 122

(2) Removal of Document Sensor

1) Remove the ADF cover.

2) Remove the screw, and slide the bracket in the

direction of an arrow to remove.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the sensor bracet.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the

document sensor.

Scanner unit

Screw

Screw

Screw

Bracket

ConnectorDocument sensor

ScrewScrewHinge

ADF cover

x Scanner Section

23S0041

23S0044

Page 125: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 125/303

23S0045

128

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

(3) Removal of ADF Feed Roller

1) Remove the ADF cover.

2) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the ADF

feed shaft in the direction of the arrow.

 \See page 127

(4) Removal of ADF Paper Separator Unit

1) Carry out (1) and (2) above.

2) Remove the ADF paper separator unit.

 \See page 127

3) Remove the E-rings, and remove the ADF feed

roller.

Bush

E-ringE-rings

E-rings

Roller

Roller

ADF feed roller

ADF feed shaftScrew

23S0047

23S0046

ADF paper separator unit

Page 126: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 126/303

23S0048

23S0042

129

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

(5) Removal of Scanner JAM sensor

(Photo-receiving)

1) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

 ADF cover.

2) Remove the ADF feed shaft.

3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

 ADF feed inlet.

 \See page 128

4) Remove the screw, together with the bracket.

5) Disconnect the connector.

6) Remove the scanner JAM sensor.

(6) Removal of Timing Belt

1) Remove the ADF front cover.

2) Loosen the tension's fixing screw.

3) Pull the timing belt off the pulley, and removethe timing belt.

 \See page 122

ADF cover

Screw

Tension

PulleyE-ringTiming belt

Sensor

Connector

Bracket

Scanner JAM sensor

Screw

Screw

Screw Screw

Screw

ADF feed inlet

23S0043

Page 127: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 127/303

23S0039

23S0036

130

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

(7) Removal of Scanner Clutch

1) Remove the ADF rear cover.

2) Remove the document cover.

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors.4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the

angle.

5) Remove the scanner clutch.

 \See page 122

 \See page 122

(8) Removal of ADF Cover Opening /

Closing Switch

1) Remove the ADF rear cover.

2) Remove the 2 terminals.

3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

 ADF cover opening / closing switch.

 \See page 122

Screw

Screw

Screws

Terminals

Scanner

clutch

Connectors

ADF cover opening / closing switch

Page 128: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 128/303

23S0040

23S0037

131

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

Motor cover

GearScrew

Screw

(9) Removal of Scanner Stepping Motor

1) Remove the ADF rear cover.

2) Remove the document cover.

3) Remove the 4 screws indicted, and remove themotor cover.

 \See page 122

 \See page 122

4) Disconnect the connector.

5) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

scanner stepping motor.

Screws

Screws

Scanner steppingmotor

Connector

Page 129: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 129/303

23S0052

23S0050

23S0038

132

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

Screws 4 connectors

Screws

Screws

Screw

Screws

Scanner unit

Guide plate

Connector

Documentposition sensor

(10) Removal of Scanner Unit

1) Remove the document tray.

2) Remove the ADF front / rear covers.

3) Remove the document cover.

4) Disconnect the 4 connectors.

5) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the

scanner unit.

 \See page 122

 \See page 122

 \See page 122

(11) Removal of Document Position Sensor

1) Remove the scanner unit.

2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the

guide plate.

3) Disconnect the connector.4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the

document position sensor.

Page 130: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 130/303

23S0051

133

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

Screw

Screw

Guide plate unit

Connectors

InverterPCB unit

(12) Removal of Inverter PCB Unit

1) Remove the scanner unit.

2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

guide plate unit.

 \See page 132

3) Disconnect the 2 connectors indicated, and

remove the inverter PCB unit.

23S0053

WARNING

¡Always remove the power cord plug from

the outlet before replacing the Inverter PCBUnit.

Page 131: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 131/303

23S0281

23S0054

134

x Scanner Sectionchap.3

Bracket Screw

Connector

Cord clamp

BracketScrew

Lamp unit

Lamp unit

(13) Removal of Lamp Unit

1) Remove the scanner unit.

2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

guide plate unit.

3) Remove the cord clamp.

4) Disconnect the connector.

 \See page 133(12)w

 \See page 132

5) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the bracet

in the direction of an arrow to remove.

6) Remove the lamp unit.

Be careful not to break the lamp.IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

23S0282

¡ Insert the lamp unit's grooves into the slots in

the brackets.

Lamp unit

Groove Groove

Page 132: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 132/303

WARNING

¡Keep hands and fingers away from the cutter

unit's blades. Do NOT touch the blades.

23S0066

23S0065

135

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

c Platemaking / Master Feed and Ejection Section

(1) Removal of Cutter Unit

1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out

the master roll.

2) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the

cover F and R.

3) Disconnect the 1 connectors indicated.

4) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the

stopper.

5) Open the master cover.

6) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

cutter unit.

Master Feed Section

Screws

Screw

ScrewsCover R

Cover FStopperConnector

Screw

Screw

Master cover

Cutter unit

Page 133: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 133/303136

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of End Mark Sensor PCB Unit.

1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out

the master roll.

2) Open the master cover.

3) Remove the 2 nuts with a spanner, and remove the

cover.

4) Remove the 2 screws.

5) Disconnect the connector indicated, and the end

mark sensor PCB unit.

23S0070

23S0071

Nut

NutCover

Screws

Connector

Cover

End mark sensor PCB unit

Page 134: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 134/303

23S0069

137

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

¡Do not touch the heat emission parts of the

thermal head.

¡The thermal head is also liable to corrode. To avoid

corrosion, keep the head free of moisture and salinity,

and do not touch its heat emission parts. Touching

these parts could scratch them.

IMPORTANT :

(3) Removal of Thermal Head

1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out

the master roll.

2) Open the master cover.

3) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

guide plate.

4) Remove the screw indicated, together with the

collar.

5) Disconnect the thermal head's 2 connectors, and

remove them together with the bracket.

6) Remove the 2 screws together with the collars,

and remove the thermal head.

23S0067

Screw

ScrewGuide plate

23S0068

Screw,collar

Connectors

Collar

Screw

Collar

Screw Thermal headWhen the thermal head is replaced,

set the HELP 44 DIP switch.

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

HELP mode H-44  \ see p.280

Do not touch the heat emission parts

Page 135: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 135/303

23S0072

23S0073

23S0074

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

9) Remove the bundle wire from the 2 connectors of 

the thermal head PCB and the clamp.

10) Close the master cover.

11) Disconnect the 4 connectors.

12) Remove the 6 screws indicated, and remove the

master feed unit.

 \See page 137 Master feed unit

1) Open the document receiving tray, and take out

the master roll.

2) Take out the drum unit.

3) Remove the front cover.

4) Remove the under cover's 4 screws, and remove

the under cover.

 \See page 124

5) Remove the 2 covers shown in the figure.

6) Disconnect the 2 connectors indicated.

7) Open the master cover.

8) Remove the guide plate.

 \See page 137

(4) Removal of Master Feed Unit

Screws

Screws

Under cover

138

Cover RScrews

Screws

Screw

Connectors

Screws

Connectors

Page 136: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 136/303139

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

1) Remove the master feed unit.

2) Remove the 4 screws.

3) Remove the bush indicated, and remove the

mater feed stepping motor.

 \See page 138

(5) Removal of Master Feed Stepping Motor

Screws

Master feed stepping motor

Bush

Screw

23S0075

Page 137: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 137/303140

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the 3 connectors.

3) Remove the cord band.

 \See page 126

4) Remove the screw.

5) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the

master ejection box.

(1) Removal of Master Ejection Box

Master Ejection Section

Master ejection box

Screws

Screw

Connector

Connector

Connector

Cord band

Page 138: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 138/303141

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of Jam / Master Ejection

Sensor (Photo-emitting PCB Unit)

1 ) Remove the master ejection box.

2) Remove the respective photo-emitting PCB units

by removing the 2 screws.

1) Remove the master ejection box.

2) Remove the 1 screw indicated, and remove the

cover.

3) Remove the timing belt from the pulley at the

part shown by the arrow.

4) Remove the 3 motor mounting screws indicated,

and remove the roll - up motor.

Do not forget to adjust the tension

after the motor is attached.

 \See page 165

IMPORTANT :

(3) Removal of Roll - up Motor

Reinstallation

Jam sensorphoto-emitting

PCB unit

Screw

Cover

Screws Motor

Timing belt

Pulley

Master ejectionsensor photo-emitting PCB

unit

Screw

 \See page 140

 \See page 140

Page 139: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 139/303

23S0078

142

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

(1) Removal of Master Clump Opening / Closing Unit

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the drum.

3) Move the position of the master clump opening / 

closing lever to the mode other than A mode.

(Use the HELP 20)

4) Turn the power off and turn it on again.

The opening / closing lever moves to the B modeand stops.

HELP mode H-20  \ see p.260

 \See page 126

5) Pull out 3 connectors.

6) Remove 3 screws to take out the opening / closing 

unit.

1) Remove the master clump opening / closing unit.2) Loosen the set screw to remove the gear.

3) Remove 3 screws to take out the motor.Set screw

Screws

Screw

(2) Removal of Clump Motor

Master Clump opening/Closing Section

23S0077

Screws

Connectors

Connector

Screws

Master clump

opening / closing unit

Clump motor

Page 140: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 140/303

23S0080

23S0079

143

c Platemaking/Master Feed and Ejection Sectionchap.3

1) Remove the master clump opening / closing unit.

2) Loosen 2 screws to loosen the tension as shown

in the figure.

 \See page 142

3) Remove the screw to remove the angle.

4) Remove the timing belt.

• Adjust tension by adjusting the master feed mas-

ter clump opening/closing lever and master ejec-

tion master clump opening/closing lever. Then fit

the timing belt on.

Adjust the A, B and C modes after

the master clump opening / closing

unit is attached to the printer mainbody.

IMPORTANT :

Main frame R

Master ejection masterclump opening/closing leverPosition hole

Position hole

Master feed master clumpopening/closing lever

Master clumpopening/closing unit

Tension Screws

Screw

Timing belt

Screw

(3) Removal of Timing Belt

 \See page 166

Reinstallation

23S0082

 \See page 167

Page 141: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 141/303

1) Remove the front cover.

2) Remove the 2 screws indicated, then remove the

bracket.3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the eleva-

tor lower limit switch.

 \See page 124

144

v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of Elevator Lower Limit Switch

After reinstalling the elevator lower

limit switch, carry out adjustment

of its clearance.

 \For adjustment method see page 173

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

Feed tray

(1) Removal of Paper Sensor

1) Access HELP mode H-02, and use it to raise the

elevator to its uppermost position.

HELP mode H-02  \ see p.241

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper

sensor.

v Paper Feed Section

23S0083

23S0084

23S0085

Paper sensor

Connector

Screws

Elevatorlower

limit switch

Connector

Page 142: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 142/303

23S0088

23S0087

23S0086

145

v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3

(3) Removal of Paper Feed Roller

1) Remove the screw indicated, and slide the paper

feed shaft in the direction of the arrow.

(4) Removal of Paper Separator Unit

1) Loosen the set screws indicated, and move the 2

paper feed rollers clear of the paper separator

unit.

2) Remove the paper separator unit.

2) Loosen the set screw indicated, and remove the

paper feed roller.

¡ Reinstall the paper feed roller so that the set

screw is positioned at the paper feed roller

shaft's counter bore.

Do not use an old paper feed roller

together with a new one.

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

After reinstalling the paper separa-

tor unit, carry out adjustment of its

clearance.

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

Screw Paper feed shaft

Paper feed roller Paper feed rollers

Paper feed rollers

Set screw

Set screws

Set screws

Paper separator unit

 \See page 171

Page 143: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 143/303

23S0091

23S0092

23S0089

23S0090

146

v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3

(5) Removal of Paper Feed Clutch Unit

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the connector.

3) Remove the screw indicated, and disconnect thepaper feed shaft from the coupling.

 \See page 126

4) Remove the 3 screws indicated, and remove the

bracket.

5) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

bush.

6) Remove the E-ring.

7) Remove the adjustment washers.

8) Remove the clutch unit coil, loosen the 2 adjust

bolts, and remove the clutch body.

Screw

Connector

Paper feed shaft

Adjust washers

Adjust washers

E-ring

E-ring

Clutch unit coil

Clutch body

Bush

Screws

Screws

Screw Bracket

Page 144: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 144/303

23S0094

23S0093

147

v Paper Feed Sectionchap.3

(6) Removal of Paper Feed Sensor

1) Remove the paper feed shaft.

2) Remove the paper separator unit.

3) Remove the 4 screws indicated, and remove the

bracket.

 \See page 145

 \See page 145 (3)q Paper feed shaftBracket

Screws Screws

Paper feed sensorConnector

Screw

4) Disconnect the connector.

5) Remove the screw indicated, and remove the

paper feed sensor.

Page 145: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 145/303148

b Drum Driving Sectionchap.3

b Drum Driving Section

(1) Removal of Sub-Frame

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the 7 screws indicated, and remove the

pump unit.

 \See page 126

3) Disconnect the 6 connectors.

4) Remove the 11 screws indicated, and remove the

sub-frame.

23S0095

23S0096

Screw

Screws

Sub-frame

Screw

Screw Screw

Screw

Screws

Screws

Screw

Screws

Pump unit

Page 146: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 146/303149

b Drum Driving Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of Drum Gear

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Remove the Sub-frame.

3) Remove the 2 E-rings, and remove the links.

 \See page 148

 \See page 126

23S0097

4) Remove the 2 screws indicated, and remove the

drum gear.

23S0098

Links

E-ring

E-ring

Screws

Drum gear

Page 147: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 147/303150

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3

4) Take out the paper stripper finger and sub paper

stripper fingers from the pipe.

Adjust the paper stripper finger

after it is installed.

IMPORTANT :

n Paper Ejection Section

(1) Removal of Paper Stripper Finger /

Sub Paper Stripper Finger

1) Open the master ejection box.

2) Remove the set screws.

3) Remove the paper stripper finger and sub paper

stripper fingers from the shaft.

Paper stripper finger

Paper stripper finger

Sub paper stripper fingers

Sub paper stripper finger

Pipe

Pipe

Reinstallation

 \See page 180

Page 148: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 148/303151

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of Paper Ejection Fan Unit

1) Remove the rear cover.

2) Disconnect the connector.3) Open the front cover, and remove the drum.

4) Remove the front cover.

5) Disconnect the connector.

6) Open the master ejection box.

7) Remove the 2 screws from the cover, and remove

the cover.

 \See page 124

 \See page 126

8) Remove the 6 screws indicated, and remove the

 jump plate F/R units.

9) Remove the 4 screws, and pull out the paper

ejection fan unit sliding in the direction of an

arrow.

23S0099

23S0100

23S0101

CoverScrews

Connector Connector

Jump plate F unit

Jump plate R unit

Screws

Screws

Screws

Screws

Paper ejection fan unit

¡Insert the driving shaft coupler to install the

paper ejection fan unit.

Reinstallation

23S0105

Drive shaft coupler(Paper ejection fan unit)

Page 149: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 149/303

23S0104

23S0103

23S0102

152

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.3

1) Remove the paper ejection fan unit.

2) Pull the paper ejection belts wider apart to

expose the screws, and secure the belts in that

position.

3) Remove the 2 screws securing the sensor

mounting angle, and remove the angle.

 \See page 151

4) Remove the 2 screws from the sensor PCB, and

remove the PCB.

Do not lose the 2 spacers.IMPORTANT :

Remove the 2 screws with a driver

Paper ejection belts

Jam sensor

Screws

Spacers

(4) Removal of Jam Sensor (Photo-receiving

PCB UNIT)

(3) Removal of Paper Ejection Belt

1) Remove the paper ejection fan unit.

2) Remove the 2 screws from the static removal

brush, and remove the static removal brush.

 \See page 151

3) Remove the 2 screws from the ends of the shaft,

and remove the shaft.

4) Stretch the belts and install them oriented as

shown in the figure.

Screw

Paper ejection belts

Screw

Shaft

Static removal brush

Screws

Page 150: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 150/303153

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(1) Removal of Screen

m Drum Section

1) Remove the drum.

2) Remove the clamp on the bottom end screen bar

to pull out the screen bar.

3) Remove 2 set screws on the top screen bar to pull

out the screen bar.

4) Remove the screen from the drum.

Do not rotate the drum reversely.IMPORTANT :

1) Pass the top end screen bar through the screen

(top end side).

2) Attach the top end screen bar to the drum.

Do not mistake the bottom end of

the screen for the top end.

IMPORTANT :

3) Pass the bottom end screen bar through the

screen (bottom end side).

4) Hold the bottom end screen bar in parallel with

the drum and roll it up to the drum rotating the

drum normally.

5) Tighten the screen bar with the clamp.

The stainless screen does not return

to the original state once it is folded.

Be careful to handle the screen.

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

Screw

Clamp

Screw

Screw

Screen

Top endscreen bar

Bottom endscreen bar

Screw

58mm(top end side)

20mm(bottom end side)

ScreenTop end screen bar

Screw

Bottom end screen bar

Bottom end screen bar

Clamp

Page 151: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 151/303154

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(2) Removal of Master Clump

(3) Removal of Base Unit

1) Remove the screen.

2) Remove 2 screws on the operation side.3) Remove the bearing plate and spring.

4) Remove 2 screws on the anti-operation side to

take out the bearing plate.

5) Remove the master clump. The master clump is

attached to the base with the magnet.

 \See page 153

Adjust the master clump after

installation.

 \See page 184

IMPORTANT :

1) Remove the master clump.

2) Remove 2 screws, and remove the base unit.

Reinstallation

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Bearing plate

Spring

Master clump

Base unit

Page 152: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 152/303155

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(4) Removal of Outer Frame (Right) Unit

1) Remove the drum.

2) Remove 2 screws on the rail and 1 screw on the

stay.

3) Remove 3 screws on the outer frame (right) unit

and knob screw.

4) Part the outer frame (right) unit a little and

remove 2 connectors.

5) Remove the outer frame (right) unit.

Reinstallation

Do not forget to adjust the rail

space after the rail is installed.

 \See page 185

IMPORTANT :

Screws

Stay

Screw

Screws

Connector

Connector

Outer frame (right) unit

Screw

Rail left

Rail right

Outer frame (right) unit

Page 153: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 153/303156

m Drum Sectionchap.3

Do not forget to adjust the rail

space after the rail is installed.

(5) Removal of Outer Frame (Left) Assy

1) Remove the dram.

2) Remove the screw on the rail to take out the rail.

3) Remove the screw on the stay to remove the stay.

4) Remove 4 screws.

5) Pull out the outer frame (left) assy with the

master clump open.

Reinstallation

 \See page 185

IMPORTANT :

Rail left

Screws

Master clump lever

Outer frame shaft Assy

Outer frame shaft assy

Stay

Rail right

Screw

Screws

Page 154: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 154/303157

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(6) Removal of Inner Frame

1) Remove the outer frame (right) unit.

 \See page 155

3) Pull out the inner frame (section inside the

drum) in the direction of an arrow.

Be careful not to damage the drum

inside.

IMPORTANT :

2) Loosen 2 set screws on the supporting plate,

move the supporting plate in the direction of 

arrow until it stops and fix it with the screw.

Slide the supporting plate in the direction of arrow

1 so that the supporting plate roller, roller unit and

roller are in contact with the inner surface of the

flange right and tighten the roller with the screw,

pressing the roller to the inner surface lightly.

Reinstallation

Screws

Supportingplate

Roller unit

Roller

Supporting plate

Screws

Roller

Page 155: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 155/303158

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(7) Removal of Ink Pump

(8) Removal of Ink Motor

1) Remove the inner frame.

2) Loosen the screw on the hose band to remove the

hose.

 \See page 157

3) Remove the screw to take out the link.

4) Remove 2 screw to take out the ink pump.

1) Remove the inner frame.

2) Cut the tie wrap.

3) Loosen the set screw to remove the rotation

plate.

4) Remove 3 screws to take out the motor.

 \See page 157

Hose band Screw

Hose

Screw

Link

Ink pump

Screws

Set screwRotation plate

Motor

Screws

Page 156: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 156/303159

m Drum Sectionchap.3

(9) Removal of Ink Detection PCB Unit

1) Remove the inner frame.

2) Pull out the connector.

3) Remove 2 screws to take out the ink detection

PCB Unit.

The toothed lock washer is attached

to one of the screws. Be careful not

to lose it.

IMPORTANT :

 \See page 157

Confirm that the detection needle is

vertical with the PCB Unit and does

not contact anywhere, when

installing the Ink detection PCB

Unit.

IMPORTANT :

Reinstallation

Screw

Connector

Screw

Toothedlock washer

Ink detection PCB unit

Ink rollerSqueegee roller

Detection needle

Page 157: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 157/303160

Chapter 4 Standards / Adjustment

z Scanner Section.........................................................162

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................162

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section.........163

Platemaking / Master Feed Section ......................163

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................163

Master Ejection Section .........................................164

(1) Attaching the Spring............................................164

(2) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................165

Master Clump opening/Closing Section ..............166

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension .....................166

(2) Positioning the Master Clump

Opening / Closing Levers.....................................166

(3) Adjusting the A / B / C Modes..............................167

c Paper Feed Section....................................................171

(1) Adjusting the Paper Separator

Unit Clearance .....................................................171

(2) Adjusting the Paper Separation Pressure...........172

(3) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray

Upper Limit Sensor .............................................172

(4) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray

Lower Limit Switch .............................................173

(5) Adjusting the G Roll Escape Amount / Timing .....................................174

(6) Adjusting the Printing Position Sensors .............175

v Drum Driving Section ................................................176

(1) Adjusting the Stop Position .................................176

(2) Adjusting the Master Attachment / 

Detachment Position ..............................................177

b Press Section ............................................................178

(1) Adjusting the Press Roll (P Roll) Sensor.............178

(2) Adjusting the Printing Area

(Press OFF Timing) ...................................................179

n Paper Ejection Section .............................................180

(1) Adjusting the Paper Stripper

Finger Clearance..................................................180

(2) Adjusting the Paper Stripper

Finger Return Stopper..........................................181

m Drum Section .............................................................182

(1) Adjusting the Ink Amount ...................................182

(2) Adjusting the Squeegee Gap................................183

(3) Adjusting the Master Clump ...............................184

(4) Adjusting the Master Clump Section ..................184

(5) Adjusting the Drum Rail Gap..............................185

DP-21S

Page 158: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 158/303161

4

, Electrical System .......................................................186

(1) Adjusting Reduction / Enlargement....................186

1. Adjusting the Longitudinal R/E

on the Platemaking Side ...................................186

2. Adjusting the Longitudinal R/E

on the Reading Side...........................................186

(2) Reading Start Position .........................................187

1. Adjusting the Top End Reading

Start Position .....................................................187

2. Adjusting the Lateral (Operation Side)

Reading Start Position ......................................187

(3) Adjusting the Platemaking Start Position..........188

1. When the Scanner Is in Use..............................188

2. When in Online..................................................188

(4) Adjusting the Document Reading Darkness.......189

1. Adjusting the White Level of the

Document Darkness ..........................................1892. Adjusting the Reading Darkness......................190

(5) Adjusting of Printer Unit's Printing Speed.........191

1. Pre-stop Speed Adjustment...............................191

2. JOG Speed Adjustment.....................................191

3. Adjustment of Printing Speeds 1-3...................192

4. To Initialize Speed Settings ..............................192

. Option .........................................................................193

(1) Adjusting and Replacing the Upper / 

Lower Blade for the TAPE CLUSTER.................193

Page 159: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 159/303162

z Scanner Sectionchap.4

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension

Adjustment procedure

1) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to

about 700g.

¡For removal of the ADF front cover.

 \See page 122

NOTE :

zScanner Section

23S0048

Set screw

Tension

Timing belt700g

Page 160: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 160/303163

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

xPlatemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Section

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension

¡For removal of master feed unit.

Adjustment procedure

1) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to

about 1kg.

 \See page 138

NOTE :

Platemaking / Master Feed Section

Set screw

Timing Belt

23S0108

1kg

Page 161: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 161/303164

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

(1) Attaching the Spring

Set the hook on the spring

and crush it to prevent

removing.

IMPORTANT :

1) Attaching the spring between A and B.

2) Attaching the spring between B and C.

3) Attaching the spring between C, D and E.

4) Attaching the spring between D, E and F.

Master Ejection Section

A : Rubber rollerB : Driving rollerC : Inverted rollerD : Driving rollerE : Inverted rollerF : Inverted roller

qSpring T (3) L90mm

C

A

B

B

E

D

F

C

E

D

A B

C

D

E

F

rSpring T (B)(3) L220mm

wSpring T (3) L104.9mm

wSpring T (3) L104.9mm

eSpring T (B)(3) L220mm

eSpring T (B)(3) L220mm

rSpring T (B)(3) L220mm

qSpring T (3) L90mm

Page 162: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 162/303165

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

(2) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension

¡For removal of the master ejection box.

Adjustment procedure

1) Loosen the tensioning screw.

2) Use the tensioning screw to adjust the belt's

tension with a force of 0.75kg applied to the

tension shaft, as shown in the figure at right.

 \See page 140

NOTE :

After adjustment

¡Function testing of roll-up motor

1) Access HELP mode H-18.

For basic HELP mode procedures

2) Press and hold down the "down"

PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT key.

For as long as this key is held down, the

roll-up motor will rotate in the reverse

direction (counterclockwise), causing the

rollers inside the master ejection box to rotate.

3) The motor will stop when the "down"

PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT key is

released.

4) Press the STOP key. The HELP mode menu

will reappear.

 \ To exit the HELP mode:

Turn the power switch to OFF.

 \ To select another HELP mode:

Enter the desired HELP mode number using the

numeric keys.

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-18 \ see p.258

0.75kg

Tension

Tensioning screw

Timing belt

Page 163: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 163/303

23S0079

23S0081

23S0082

23S0081

166

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

Adjustment procedure

1) Loosen the tension set screw.

2) Use the set screw to adjust the belt's tension to

about 1kg.

After AdjustmentBe sure to adjust the A/B/C mode

after installation to the printer.

IMPORTANT :

1. Paper feed master clump opening/closing lever

When tensioning the timing belt, ensure that the

sub frame is positioned so that the upper surface of 

the master clump opening/closing lever is aligned

(to within 0.5mm) with the rim of the positioning 

hole.

2. Paper ejection master clump opening/closing

lever

When tensioning the timing belt, ensure that the

master clump opening/closing lever is co-centered

with the sub-frame's positioning holes.

Tension Screws

Position hole Master ejection masterclump opening/closing lever

Positioning hole

Master feed master clumpopening/closing lever

Sub-frame

Positioning hole

Master feed master clump opening/closing lever

Aligned(to within 0.5mm)

Positioning holeMain frame R

Master ejection master clumpopening/closing lever

Master Clump Opening/Closing Section

(1) Adjusting the Timing Belt Tension

(2) Positioning the Master Clump

Opening / Closing Levers

¡For removal of master clump opening / closing unit.

 \See page 142

NOTE :

After Adjustment

Be sure to adjust the A/B/C mode

after installation to the printer.

IMPORTANT :

¡For removal of master clump opening / closing unit.

 \See page 142

NOTE :

¡Paper feed side

¡Paper ejection side

1kg

Page 164: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 164/303167

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

uShift

yStop in frontof lever

(3) Adjusting the A / B / C Mode

¡For description of operation.

 \See page 81

NOTE :

1. Adjustment for B mode

Adjustment procedure

1) Remove the drum from the machine body.

2) Access HELP mode H-20.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260

3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master

clump open/close lever moves into the "more

open than B mode (toward C mode) position"

(see right).

4) Turn the power off, then on again.

The master clump switch lever will move into the

B mode position and stop there.5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the

machine body.

6) Open the plate ejection box. Then press the JOG

switch (drum rotator switch) to move the master

clump to a position in front of the open/close

lever, and stop it there.

7) Move the master clump, paying attention to the

clearance at the same time.

WARNING¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-

ing the JOG switch.

¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the

machine during operation. They could be

caught up or crushed in the machinery,

resulting in injury.

B mode

C mode

¡More open than B mode (toward C mode) position

¡When drum is removed from main body (A mode)

Page 165: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 165/303168

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

Standard value

Standard value

¡Check that the clearance between the master clump

lever and master clump open/close lever is within the

range given below.

If the clearance it outside the standard range:

1) Turn the fixing screw indicated to move the B

mode shade plate and thereby adjust the

clearance.

After adjustment

Follow the procedure below to return to the

previous state.

1) Remove the drum.

2) Access HELP mode H-20.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master

clump open/close lever moves into the A mode

position (see right).

4) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the

machine body.

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260

ItemClearance between masterclump lever and master clumpopen/close lever

1.0 - 1.5mm

¡A mode

Close

Open

B mode sensor (PS4)

B mode shade plate

Fixing screw

A / C mode sensor (PS3)

Master clumpopen/close lever

Master clump lever

1.0~1.5mm

Page 166: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 166/303169

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

0.5-1.0mm

2. Adjustment for A and C modes

Before adjustment

A and C mode adjustment must be

carried out AFTER B mode

adjustment has been completed.

IMPORTANT :

Adjustment procedure

1) Remove the drum from the machine body.

2) Access HELP mode H-20.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260

3) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master

clump open/close lever moves into the "more

open than B mode (toward C mode) position" (see

right).

4) Turn the power off, then on again.

The master clump open/close lever will move into

the B mode position and stop there.

5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the

machine body.

6) Access HELP mode H-09.

7) Press the PRINT key to move the drum to the

master detachment position, and stop it there.

8) Use HELP20 to move the master clump open/ close lever to the C mode position.

HELP mode H-09 \ see p.248

Do not move the master clump

open/close lever towards the A

mode position from the B mode

position. Doing so will break the

master clump.

9) Open the scanner unit.

IMPORTANT :

B mode

C mode

¡More open than B mode (toward C mode) position

¡Stopping drum in master detachment position

¡When drum is removed from main body (A mode)

Page 167: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 167/303170

x Platemaking / Master Feed / Ejection Sectionchap.4

Standard value

¡Check that the clearance between the master ejection

box's rubber roller and the master clump plate is

within the range given below.

If the clearance is outside the standard range

1) Turn the fixing screw indicated to move the A/C

mode shade plate and thereby adjust theclearance. This operation adjusts the clearance

for both the A and C modes.

Do not press the master clump

against the rubber roller.

IMPORTANT :

After adjustment

Follow the procedure below to return to the

previous state.

1) Turn the power off, then on again.

The master clump open/close lever will move into

the B mode position and stop there.

2) Remove the drum.

3) Access HELP mode H-20.

4) Press and hold down the "up" PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT key, until the master

clump open/close lever moves into the A mode

position (see right).

5) Turn off the power, and install the drum to the

machine body.

HELP mode H-20 \ see p.260

Standard valueItemClearance between masterejection box's rubber roller andmaster clump plate

0.5 - 1.0mm

¡A mode

Close

Open

B mode sensor (PS4)

A / C mode shade plate

A mode sensor (PS3)

Fixing screw

Rubber roller

Master clump plate

0.5~1.0mm

Page 168: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 168/303171

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4

cPaper Feed Section

(1) Adjusting the Paper Separator Unit Clearance

¡For description of operation .

¡For removal of paper separator unit .

Adjustment procedure

¡When the paper separator unit is installed, use

the adjustment bolt to adjust the unit so that itmoves in direction q without sticking, and

moves smoothly in direction w. Tighten the bolt's

nut to fix the unit in the adjusted position.

 \See page 145

 \See page 90

NOTE :

Paper separator unit

23S0106

q

w

Nut

Page 169: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 169/303172

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4

(2) Adjusting the Paper Separation Pressure

¡For description of operation .

¡For removal .

Adjustment procedure

1) Apply a spring balance as shown at right, then

turn the separation pressure adjust screw so

that the balance reads 150-160g.

¡Turning the screw clockwise increases the

pressure.

¡Turning the screw counterclockwise decreasesthe pressure.

 \See page 145

 \See page 90

NOTE :

(3) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray Upper Limit Sensor

¡For description of operation .

Adjustment procedure

1) Insert a 1mm thick strip of material between the

paper feed roller and the paper feed inlet.

2) Loosen the 2 screws indicated, then adjust the

sensor's position so that the bottom surface of 

the paper feed shaft lever is at the center of thesensor.

3) After adjustment, tighten the screws.

 \See page 94

NOTE :

Spring balance150-160g

Paper separation

pressure adjust screw

Screw

Paper feed trayupper limit sensor

Screw

1mm thick strip

Position bottomsurface at sensor's

center

43SH0403

23S0225

Page 170: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 170/303173

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4

(4) Adjusting the Paper Feed Tray Lower Limit Switch

¡For description of operation.

¡For removal.

Adjustment method

1) Access HELP mode H-02.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes:

2) Press and hold down the "down" PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT key until the paper feed

tray is at its lowermost position. The elevator

motor will run (i.e. the paper feed tray will

descend) for as long as the key is held down.

3) Check that the dimension indicated in the figure

at right conforms to the value shown below.

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-02  \ see p.241

 \See page 144

 \See page 95

NOTE :

If the feed length is not the standard value

1) Loosen the screws, then adjust the lower limit

switch to a position that yields the standard

clearance value.

cMoving the sensor in the direction shifts thelowermost position downward.

dMoving the sensor in the direction shifts the

lowermost position upward.

2) After adjustment, tighten the screws.

Standard value

Standard valueItem

Paper feed tray clearance inlower limit position

14mm

23S0109

23S0107

14mm

Paper feed traylower limit switch

ScrewsLevelposition

Page 171: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 171/303174

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4

(5) Adjusting the G Roll Escape Amount /

Timing

Adjustment procedure

1) Turn the main motor shaft by hand, to move theescape cam. Stop turning when the bottom of the

escape cam reaches the bearing side of the

escape lever, so that the cam stops in that

position.

2) Loosen the eccentric shaft fixing screw. Then

turn the eccentric shaft to adjust the escape

amount.

¡For description of operation.

Standard value

 \See page 88

NOTE :

Standard valueItem

Clearance between escapelever's bearing and escapecam's bolt

2±0.2mm

23S0228

Bearing

2±0.2mm

Eccentricshaft

Screw

Peek through the inspection hole. Escape lever

Escape cam

DP-21S

Page 172: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 172/303175

c Paper Feed Sectionchap.4

(6) Adjusting the Printing Position Sensors

¡For description of operation.

1. Central sensor

Adjustment procedure

1) To adjust the sensor's position, position the

screws of the sensor bracket's rectangular holes

in the center of those holes, and fix the screws in

that position.

NOTE :

2. Limit sensor

Adjustment procedure

1) Position the screws of the sensor bracket's

rectangular holes in the center of those holes,

and fix the screws in that position.

2) Loosen the limit sensor shade plate fixing screw.

Then adjust the distance between the centerline

of the central sensor and the edge of the central

sensor shade plate to 20 ±1mm.

 \See page 91

Limit sensor

Limit sensor

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

Center sensor

¡Top limit

23S0229

23S0230

23S0231

Sensor bracketCenter

Center

¡Bottom limit 20mm

Sensor bracketCenter

Center

Center

Center

Page 173: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 173/303176

v Drum Drive Unitchap.4

Stopper Groove

JOG switch(DRUM ROTATORswitch)

Drum stop detection edge

(1) Adjusting the Stop Position

vDrum Driving Section

Before adjustment

¡Adjusting the the drum position must be

performed AFTER printing speed adjustment

is complete.

Adjustment procedure

1) Press and hold down the JOG switch (DRUM

ROTATOR switch). Release the switch when a

"beep" tone sounds and the drum stops.

IMPORTANT :

 \See page 191

¡For description of operation .

Standard position

¡The stop position is correctly adjusted when the

groove in the drum flange is aligned with the

stopper.

If the drum is not adjusted to the standard stop

position:

 Adjust the position of the drum home position / 

JAM detection sensor so that the stopper fits

smoothly into the groove when the drum is pulled

out.

[ Moving the sensor in this direction makes

stopping occur later.

 \Moving the sensor in this direction makes

stopping occur earlier.

NOTE :

 \See page 98

WARNING

¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-

ing the JOG switch.

¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the

machine during operation. They could be

caught up or crushed in the machinery,

resulting in injury.

23S0232

Screws

Page 174: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 174/303177

v Drum Drive Unitchap.4

Item

Advances the stop position

Sets back the stop position

Masterattachment/det

achmentposition edge

Open/close lever

Open/close arm

+-1mm

+-1mm

(2) Adjusting the Master Attachment/Detachment Position

¡For description of operation.

1. Master detachment position

¡The correct position for stopping of the drum

(position for master detachment) is when the

center axis of the master clump open/close arm

and the center axis of the master clump open/ 

close lever are aligned in a straight line. Adjust

so that the offset of the alignment of these two

center axes is ±1mm (gauge this value visually).

Adjustment procedure

1) Access HELP mode H-09, the drum position

check mode.

NOTE :

4) Loosen the screws indicated, turn the master

attachment/detachment sensor shade plate a

little in the direction of the arrows, and

provisionally tighten the screws.

5) Repeat step 2), and check the center axis

alignment offset.

6) If necessary, repeat steps 2) through 5) until the

center axis alignment offset is within ±1mm.

7) Properly tighten the screws, and check 6) again.

2. Master attachment position

¡Perform adjustment of master attachment

position at the same time as that of master

detachment position. Adjust both positions

to an accuracy of ±1mm.

Standard value

Offset in alignment of centeraxes of master clumpopen/close arm and masterclump open/close lever

±1mm

 \See page 99

HELP mode H-09  \ see p.248

Master attachment position

Open/close arm

Open/close lever

Master detachment

position

23S0234

23S0235

23S0236

23S0233

Screws

Page 175: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 175/303178

b Press Sectionchap.4

Screws

P rollsensor

Bracket

Bracket

About1mm

(1) Adjusting the of Press Roll (P Roll) Sensor

bPress Section

¡For description of operation.

Adjustment procedure

1) Loosen the screw indicated. Then move the

sensor bracket up/down to adjust the press

roll so that when it is pushed down to the

lowest position by the cam, the distance

between the bottom of its sensor and the

end of the bracket is about 1mm.

NOTE :

 \See page 105

23S0238

Page 176: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 176/303179

b Press Sectionchap.4

20mm

Rear end of opening

Drum unit

Press roll

Main motor shaft

Drum flange

Mark

Press roll

Screw

Adjust collarHexbolts

Makemark here

(2) Adjusting the Printing Area (Press OFF Timing)

¡For description of operation.

Adjustment procedure

1) Make a mark on the end surface of the drum

flange, in a position 20mm forward (in the direc-

tion of the forward end) from the rear end of the

drum's opening(hole section).

2) With the press roll activated, turn the main

motor shaft by hand, and stop turning when the

press roll starts to descend (move in the direction

of the arrow).

Standard value

¡Open the front cover, and check whether the

center of the press roll is aligned with the

mark made in step 1).

NOTE :

Standard valueItem

Alignment of mark on flangeend and center of press roll

±2mm

If the alignment is not correct:

1) Loosen the 2 hex bolts indicated.

2) Loosen the adjustment collar (eccentric) fixing 

screw.

3) Turn the adjustment collar (eccentric) to move

the flange and adjust the alignment.

Moving the flange upward makes turning off of

the press occur later  \ thereby making the

printing range longer

Moving the flange downward makes turning offof the press occur earlier  \ thereby making the

printing range shorter

 \See page 103

23S0237

23S0246

23S0239

Page 177: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 177/303180

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.4

WARNING

¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when

operating the JOG switch.

¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside themachine during operation. They could be

caught up or crushed in the machinery,

resulting in injury.

Pinch lever

Roller

Lever

Main motor shaft

Paper stripper finger

Drumsurface

About0.5mm

(1) Adjusting the Paper Stripper Finger Clearance

nPaper Ejection Section

¡For description of operation.

Adjustment procedure

1) With the pinch lever raised up, turn the main

motor shaft. Stop turning when the lever's roller

is positioned at the bottom of the paper stripper

finger cam.

NOTE :

Standard value

¡Check that the clearance between the drum

surface and the paper stripper finger conforms

to the value shown below.

If the clearance is not the standard value:

1) Loosen the screw indicated and use the stopper

to adjust the clearance to the standard value.

Then retighten the screws.

After adjustment:

¡After adjustment, press the JOG switch (DRUM

ROTATOR switch) to return the drum to its

home position.

IMPORTANT :

Standard valueItem

Clearance between drum sur-face and tip of paper stripperfinger

about 0.5mm

 \See page 107

23S0240

23S0247

23S0241

Screw

Page 178: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 178/303181

n Paper Ejection Sectionchap.4

Pinch lever

Bracket Clearance

Screws

If the clearance is not the standard value:

Loosen the 2 screws indicated and use the

stopper to adjust the clearance to the

standard value. Then retighten the screws.

After adjustment:

¡After adjustment, press the JOG switch (DRUM

ROTATOR switch) to return the drum to its

home position.

IMPORTANT :

(2) Adjusting the Paper Stripper Finger Return Stopper

Adjustment procedure

1) Turn the main motor shaft by hand until a

clearance is opened up between the pinch lever

and the bracket.

Standard valueItem

Clearance between lever andpaper stripper finger returnstopper

about 1mm

WARNING

¡Do not touch the drum or rolls when operat-

ing the JOG switch.

¡Do not put your hands or fingers inside the

machine during operation. They could be

caught up or crushed in the machinery,

resulting in injury.

23S0242

23S0243

Standard value

¡Check that the clearance between the lever and

the paper stripper finger return stopper conforms

to the value shown below.

Lever

about1mm

Paper stripperfinger return

stopper

Page 179: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 179/303182

m Drum Sectionchap.4

Adjusting the ink adjusting knob

¡For removal.

NOTE :

mDrum Section

(1) Adjusting the Ink Amount

Adjustment procedure

1) When printed too dark or too light on the

operation side:

• Too dark: switch in the (-) direction

(3 settings)

• Too light: switch in the (+) direction(3 settings)

2) When printed too dark or too light on the rear

side:

• Too dark: switch in the (-) direction

(3 settings)

• Too light: switch in the (+) direction

(3 settings)3) When printed too dark or too light on the entire

surface:

• Adjust the above 1) and 2) at the same time.

There are 7 settings, standard and

±3 settings to adjust the printing

darkness. Print more than ten

sheets every time the printing

darkness is switched by one setting

until the most desirable printingdarkness is obtained.

Repeat the above procedures until

the most desirable printing darkness

is obtained.

IMPORTANT :

Ink adjusting knob on therear side

Ink adjusting knob on theoperation side

Do not loosen set screw

¡Ink adjusting knob on the operation side

(standard position)

Too dark

Too light

 \See page 153

Too dark

Too light

Do not loosen set screw

¡Ink adjusting knob on the rear side

(standard position)

Page 180: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 180/303183

m Drum Sectionchap.4

(2) Adjusting the Squeegee Gap

¡For removal.

Adjustment procedure

¡The gap between the squeegee and the ink roller

is adjusted as shown in the figure when the ink

amount is based on the standards.

If the ink amount does not meet the standards,

adjust it as follows:-

NOTE :

If the clearance is not the standard value

1) 2 set screws 1 are used in one place. Remove one

set screw 1 and loosen the other one. Perform the

same operation for both sides. Be careful not to

lose the removed set screws.

2) Loosen set screws 2 on both sides.

3) Adjust the gap with the adjusting screws on both

sides so that the space on both sides meets the

standards.

After adjustment

1) Tighten set screw 2.

2) Tighten set screw 1.

3) Check the gap again after the ink amount

adjusting knob is moved several times in the

direction + or -.

4) If the gap is proper, attach set screw 1 and

tighten it to fix.

Squeegee

Gap

Ink roller

SqueegeeInk roller0.030.04mm

Set screw 2

Set screw 1

¡Operation side

Adjustingscrew

Set screw 2

Set screw 1

Adjusting screw

Ink adjusting knob

 \See page 153

Ink adjusting knob

¡Rear side

0.030.04mm

0.030.04mm

Standard valueItem

Clearance between squeegeeand ink roller

0.03mm-0.04mm

Standard value

Page 181: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 181/303184

m Drum Sectionchap.4

(3) Adjusting the Master Clump

¡For removal.

When the master clump parallelism is not proper,

the master creases. When the master clump is not

flat, the master is easily removed and creases.

* Adjust the master clump with the set screw on the

operation side.

1. Adjusting the clump parallelism

Adjustment procedure

1) Loosen the set screws on the clump plate and

shaft to adjust the parallelism.

NOTE :

Loosen the set screw on the

operation side to adjust.

But do not loosen the set screw on

the lever shaft.

IMPORTANT :

2. Adjusting the clump flatness

Adjustment procedure

1) Cut the master, leaving 20mm wide piece at

three places, both sides and center. Have the

clump plate grip the three sections.

2) When the resistance for pulling the master out

is not stable, rotate the clump screw to adjust.

(4) Adjusting the Master Clump Section

Adjustment procedure

1) Adjust with HELP mode 29 so that the clump

amount of the master (A section in the figure) is

0~3mm with the master attached.

2) After HELP 29 adjustment, press the master set

switch and perform master set movement once.

(Be sure to remove all paper scraps.) Then

perform platemaking, and check the gripper

margin.

Set screws

Clump plate

Clump plate

Clump plate

Rubber magnet Torsion

Master

20mm

Master Master

Operation sideLever shaft

Set screws (for adjustment)

shaft

 \See page 154

20mm 20mm

HELP mode H-29  \ see p.268

Master clump

Page 182: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 182/303185

m Drum Sectionchap.4

(5) Adjusting the Drum Rail Gap

1. Operation side

Adjustment procedure

1) Attach the drum to the main body.

2) Loosen the set screw on the rail to adjust so that

the gap between the rail (both sides) and the

roller on the operation side is about 0.3mm.

3) Tighten the set screw to fix the rail.

2. Rear side

Adjustment procedure

1) Open the rear cover on the main body.

2) Loosen the screws on the rail to adjust so that

the gap between the roller on the rear side and

the rail right / left unit is about 0.3mm.

3) Tighten the screw to fix the rail.

Guide rail left Guide rail right

0.3mm0.3mm

Rail unit left ScrewScrew Rail unit right

23S0244

Guide rail left Guide rail right

0.3mm0.3mm

Rail unit left ScrewScrew Rail unit right

23S0245

Page 183: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 183/303186

, Electrical systemchap.4

(1) Adjusting Reduction / Enlargement

1. Adjusting the Longitudinal R / E on thePlatemaking Side

Adjustment procedure

1) Set the HELP mode.

Turn the power on with the PRINTING SPEED

ADJUSTMENT keys and held down.

2) Set to H-30 (Test pattern printing mode). Press

the PRINT key with the 3 and 0 keys held

down.

3) Set the plate darkness to NORMAL, perform

platemaking and print paper*. No need to place

the document.*DP-23S : print B4 paper

*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper

Standard values:

¡Check that A section of the printed test pattern is

200 ± 0.5mm.

If the clearance is not the standard value:

1) If not, adjust with the H-22.

HELP mode H-22  \ see p.261

Adjustment procedure

1) Prepare a basic document as shown in the figure.

Draw a line (main-scanning direction) at the

position 30mm from the top end of the paper*

and at the position 200mm from the above line.

*DP-23S : print B4 paper

*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper

2) Place the document on the document table to

perform platemaking and printing.

Standard values:

¡Compare the size of  A section of the printed

image with that of the basic document. Check

that the difference of the size is ±2.0 mm.

If the clearance is not the standard value:

1) If not, adjust with the H-24.

HELP mode H-24  \ see p.263

Center of the paper

,Electrical system

23S0312

¡Test pattern 3

HELP mode H-30  \ see p.269

2. Adjusting the Longitudinal R / E on the

Reading Side

Adjust the longitudinal R / E on the

reading side after the longitudinal R

/ E on the platemaking side.

IMPORTANT :

Before adjustment

Page 184: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 184/303187

, Electrical systemchap.4

(2) Reading Start Position

1. Adjusting the Top End Reading Start Position

Adjustment procedure

1) Mark with 1mm interval up to 5mm from the top

end of the paper to prepare a test document.

2) Perform platemaking and printing to the same

size and to two printouts.

3) Adjust with the HELP35 so that the image of the

second printout is printed with 3mm margin left.

HELP mode H-35  \ see p.273

2. Adjusting the Lateral (Operation Side)

Reading Start Position

Adjustment procedure

1) Make a standard document (as shown in the

figure) from a sheet of paper*.

Draw a 100mm line at the position 30mm

from the right end and from the top end of the

paper*.

*DP-23S : print B4 paper

*DP-21S/21L : print A4 paper

2) Compare the printed image with the basic

document.

Check the difference between the straight lines

in the main-scanning direction.

3) Adjust with the HELP H-36 so that

L1 - L2 ±3mm.

Adjusting direction

¡L1<L2 : Backward

¡L1<L2 : Toward you

HELP mode H-36  \ see p.274

¡Standard document

30mm

100mm

Print

Mark with 1mminterval from the topend of the document

Mark this cornerwith each other

Document basic line

L2 L1

Document

Printing paper

Print ejectiondirection

Basic line of the printed sample

2 printouts

2 - 3mm

Document

23S0313

23S0314

23S0315

Page 185: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 185/303188

, Electrical systemchap.4

(3) Adjusting the Platemaking Start Position

¡ Adjust the platemaking start position when in online after the printing position sensor

and master attachment / detachment position are adjusted. \See page 177

 \See page 175

¡ Adjust the platemaking start position with the scanner in use after the printing position sensor

, master attachment / detachment position and top end reading start

position are adjusted.

 \See page 177 \See page 175

IMPORTANT :

Adjustment procedure

1) Set the printing position (top and bottom direction)

to the standard.

2) Draw a line at the position 30mm from the top

end of the document and prepare a basic document

as shown in the figure.

3) Compare the processed image with the basic

document.

Check the difference of the lines inthe sub-scanning

direction.

4) Adjust with the HELP mode, H-37 so that

L1 - L2 ± 3mm.

Adjusting direction¡L1<L2 : Upward

¡L1>L2 : Downward

HELP mode H-37  \ see p.275

¡Standard document

HELP mode H-16  \ see p.257

Mark this corner with each other

Documentbasic line

L2

L1

Document

Printing paper

Print ejection direction

Basic line of theprinted sample

23S0316

23S0317

Draw a line at the position 30mmfrom the top end of the document

1. When the Scanner Is in Use

Before adjustment

2. When in Online

IMPORTANT :

 \See page 187

Adjustment procedure

1) Perform platemaking and printing of the online test pattern. Adjust with the HELP mode, H-16 so that

the basic line is positioned ± 3mm from the top end of the paper.

Before adjustment

Page 186: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 186/303189

, Electrical systemchap.4

(4) Adjusting the Document Reading Darkness

¡For description of operation.

1. Adjusting the White Level of the Document

Darkness

The basic darkness of the document (lightness of 

the white section of the document = white level) is

detected by reading the document darkness. If the

white level is not proper, printed surface gets dirty

or the light section of the document is not processed

for platemaking.

NOTE :

 \See page 56

Adjusting the White Level

1) Call the HELP mode.

Take the following procedures for adjustment:-

1. Text mode: H-33

2. Photograph mode: H-26

2) Input the correction value on the keypad, "0" or "1".

¡When the processed document gets dirty :

"0 1 1 1" The white level is corrected down.

¡When the thin section of the document is notprocessed for platemaking :

"1 1 1 1" The white level is corrected up.

3) Press the = key to memorize the correction

 value.

4) Perform platemaking and printing to check the

darkness.

HELP mode H-26  \ see p.265

HELP mode H-33  \ see p.272

¡In the normal state

¡When the white level is too high:

¡When the white level is too low:

the section is printed dirty

the section is not processed for platemaking

Sign flag

A : 0 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Correction amount display

Correction amount display

¡HELP mode H-33/26 display

Page 187: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 187/303190

, Electrical systemchap.4

2. Adjusting the Reading Darkness

Adjustment procedure

 Adjust the document reading darkness in

platemaking as follows:

1) Help mode

Text mode : H-50

Photograph mode : H-23

2) Input the correction value on the keypad, "1" or

"0" (Sign flag / Collection amount display).

3) Press the= key to memorize the correction

 value

4) Perform platemaking and printing to check the

darkness.

• When adjusted with the H-23 by one stage, the

standard position on the control panel changes

to 3/8 stage as follows : -

HELP mode H-23  \ see p.262

HELP mode H-50  \ see p.281

dark

light

H-50, H-23: [0001]

H-50, H-23: [0001]

Adjusting the platemaking darknesson the control panel

Normal

dark

light

dark

light

Normal

23S0318

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Correction amount display

¡HELP mode H-50/23 display

Page 188: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 188/303191

, Electrical systemchap.4

Pre-stop speed

¡HELP mode H-01 display

JOG speed

¡HELP mode H-01 display

Main motor PCB unit

(5) Adjusting of Printer Unit's Printing Speed

1. Pre-stop Speed Adjustment

Adjustment procedure

1) Access HELP mode H-01.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key

repeatedly, to select PHOTOGRAPH.

3) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be

4-6rpm.

If the value is not correct:

¡Turn the main motor PCB unit's VR1 to adjust thedisplayed value to within the correct range.

4) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value will

be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will

reappear.

HELP mode H-01  \ see p.238

 \See page 235

2. JOG Speed Adjustment

Adjustment procedure

1) Access HELP mode H-01.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key

repeatedly, to select TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH.

3) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be

16rpm.

If the value is not correct:

¡Turn the main motor PCB unit's VR 2 to adjust the

displayed value to the correct value.

4) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value will

be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will

reappear.

HELP mode H-01  \ see p.238

 \See page 235

VR1

23S0283

Main motor PCB unit

VR2

23S0284

1 1 1 r p m

1 1 1 r p m

Page 189: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 189/303192

, Electrical systemchap.4

¡HELP mode H-01 display

3. Adjustment of Printing Speeds 3

Adjustment procedure

1) Access HELP mode H-01.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

2) Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH keyrepeatedly, to select TEXT.

3) Use the "down" PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT

key to select SPEED 1.

4) Check the speed value displayed. The value should be

60rpm.

If the value is not correct:

¡Use the FUNCTION SWITCH and SELECT

keys to adjust the displayed value to the correct value.

5) If desired, set the other printing speeds (2,3) by

repeating steps 2) through 4) , and selecting the

desired speed in step 2).

6) (If setting the other speeds:) Check the speed values

displayed. The values should be:¡Speed 2 ... 80rpm

¡Speed 3 ... 120rpm

If the values are not correct:

¡Use the FUNCTION SWITCH and SELECT

keys to adjust the displayed values to the correct

 values.

7) Press the STOP key. The new (adjusted) value

will be memorized, and the HELP mode menu will

reappear.

4. To Initialize Speed Settings:

1) Access HELP mode H-01.

For basic HELP mode procedures.

2) Press the [=] and CLEAR key. The settings

will be initialized.

3) Press the STOP key. The HELP mode menu will

reappear.

¡After initialization, new speed values must be set.

NOTE :

C

HELP mode H-01  \ see p.238

 \See page 235

HELP mode H-01  \ see p.239

 \See page 235

¡HELP mode H-01 display

Mode number flashes

H E L P S E L E C T 0 1

Printing speed

1 1 1 r p m

Page 190: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 190/303193

. Optionchap.4

Adjustment procedure

1) When the solenoid is pulled manually, adjust the

solenoid position up and down so that the upper

blade edge is positioned 1.5 - 2.0 mm lower than

the lower blade.

2) At the same time, adjust the space with the

adjusting washer so that the space of the blades

is about 0.5 mm when seen from the top.

.Option

(1) Adjusting and Replacing the Upper /

Lower Blade for the TAPE CLUSTER

43SH0414

Lower blade

Lower blade

Solenoid

Upper blade

Upper blade

1.5-2mm

Page 191: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 191/303194

MEMO

Page 192: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 192/303

195

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructions .....................196

1. Before Installation ..................................................196

2. Installation Instructions.........................................196

(1) Unpacking Checks ............................................196

(2) Assembly ...........................................................197

(3) Power Switch ON ..............................................199

(4) Setting the Master Roll ....................................200

(5) Preparation of Drum .........................................202(6) Setting the Ink Pack .........................................204

(7) Supplying Ink and Adjusting Ink Amount ......205

(8) If Option are Installed ......................................205

5

Chapter 5 Installation

Page 193: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 193/303

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

196

zDUPRINTER InstallationInstructions

1. Before Installation :

Safety precautions

¡The precautions below are vital for safety and must

be taken.

WARNING

¡Do not use a source voltage other

than that specified. Do not connectmultiple loads to a single outlet.

Fire or electrical shock can result.

¡Do not place the machine in an

unstable position, such as on an

unsteady support or sloping area.

If the machine drops or falls over, a

person could get injured.

¡Do not place the machine in a

humid or dusty area. Fire orelectrical shock can result.

¡When the DUPRINTER is

installed to the printer stand, lock

the casters. Otherwise the

equipment could move or fall

over, causing injury.

¡To move the equipment, push on

the printer stand. Pushing on theDUPRINTER is dangerous and

could make the equipment fall

over.

If the optional printer stand is used:

2. Installation Instructions

(1) Unpacking Checks

¡Use only the power cord that is

provided among the accessories.

Insert the power cord plug firmlyinto the socket, so that proper

electrical contact is effected.

aUse of any other power cord could

result in imperfect grounding.

If grounding is imperfect and

electrical leakage occurs, fire or

electric shock could result.

q Packages for 1 complete DUPRINTER:

DP-23S

• 1 printer unit package (product name: DP-23S)

DP-21S

• 1 printer unit package (product name: DP-21S)

Check that the above 2 packages are present.

w Unpack the package.

Item QuantityPrinter unit proper 1

Installation instructions 1

Operation Manual 1

Warranty 1

Master ejection core 1

Power cord 1

Document Tray 1

Print Tray 1

Carry out unpacking in a place that

is safe for the work.

IMPORTANT :

e Contents checks for each package.

Check that the packages have the contents listed

below.

Printer unit package

If the optional printer stand is used, install it now

by referring to the instructions on the following

page. \See page 198

Page 194: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 194/303

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

197

(2) Assembly

CAUTION

¡To lift the printer unit, hold it by its handles ONLY.

Lifting of the printer unit should be performed by

2 or more persons, not by 1 person alone.

¡Place the printer unit on a flat, level surface.

(1) Assembly of DUPRINTER

q Pull out the printer unit's 4 handles. Then lift

the printer unit up by its handles and place it in

the installation location.

23S0012

23S0013

w Push the 4 handles back in.

e Remove all the remaining fixing tape.

r  Attach the Document Tray to the DUPRINTER.

23S0110

t  Attach the print tray, by fitting it into the slots

in the DUPRINTER's top section.

Handles

Document tray

Handles

Pull out

Pull out

Slot in top section

Print tray

Page 195: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 195/303

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

198

q Unpacking Check.

2Check that the printer stand unit package is

present.

w Unpack the printer stand unit package.

e Check that the package has the contents listed

below.

r  Assemble the printer stand unit.

t Place the printer stand unit on a flat, level

surface.

y Lock the printer stand unit's casters.

u Pull out the printer unit's 4 handles.

i Lift up the printer unit by its handles, and

mount it onto the printer stand unit so that its

rubber feet mate into the recesses in the

printer stand.

o Push the 4 handles back in.

!0 Remove all the remaining fixing tape.

!1  Attac h the Do cum ent Tra y to th e

DUPRINTER.

!2  Attach the print tray, by fitting it into the slots

in the DUPRINTER's bottom section.

Carry out unpacking and assembly

in a place that is safe for the work.

IMPORTANT :

Using the optional printer stand

* Check the unit's casters for abnormality.

Item Quantity

Printer stand unit 1

23S0027

23S0023

23S0111

Pull out

Recesses Recesses

HandleHandle

Runner feet

Slot in bottom section

Print Tray

CAUTION

¡To lift the printer unit, hold it by its handles

ONLY. Lifting of the printer unit should be

performed by 2 or more persons, not by 1person alone.

Document Tray

Page 196: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 196/303

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

199

q Make sure that the power switch is OFF.

w Insert the plug on one end of the power cord (one

of the accessories) into the DUPRINTER's power

inlet.

e Insert the plug on the other end of the power

cord into the power outlet.

WARNING

¡Connect the DUPRINTER to an outlet providing a

60Hz, 15A power supply of at least 120V.

¡Insert the power cord's plug correctly into the

outlet, so that electrical connection is effected

completely.

¡Position the DUPRINTER close to the power

outlet. Do not connect multiple loads to a single

outlet.

If use of an extension cord is necessary:

Extension cord should be of at least 130V, 15A

specification, conform to standard, and notexceed 5m in length.

¡The power cord should never be stepped on, or

crushed between objects. If it is, accidents could

result.

120V AC model

(3) Power Switch ON

WARNING

¡Connect the DUPRINTER to an outlet providing a

50Hz, 8A power supply of at least 230V.

¡Insert the power cord's plug correctly into the

outlet, so that electrical connection is effected

completely.

¡Position the DUPRINTER close to the power

outlet. Do not connect multiple loads to a single

outlet.

If use of an extension cord is necessary:

Extension cord should be of at least 250V, 8A

specification, conform to standard, and not

exceed 5m in length.

¡The power cord should never be stepped on, orcrushed between objects. If it is, accidents could

result.

r Turn the power switch ON.

t Check the liquid crystal display on the operation

panel.

¡The display should function normally.

230V AC model

23S0010

Power cordPower inlet

Page 197: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 197/303

23S0004

23S0005

23S0006

23S0003

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

200

(4) Setting the Master Roll

q Open the document receiving tray.

r Pull the lever, and open the master cover.

w Pull the new master roll out of its bag, theninsert it into the machine, making sure that its

seal is correctly oriented.

Master cover

Lever

WARNING¡Do not remove the cover affixed with

Warning Label 1.

¡Personnel can get injured by the movable

cutter installed inside.

WarningLabel 1

t Pull out the master, and pass it under the bar.

e Peel off the seal. (First make sure that the end of 

the roll with the green line is at the control

panel side.)

Seal

Bar

Green line

y Push in the master, aligned with the set line,

until the master's leading edge contacts the

interior surface.

SET LINE

23S0001

23S0002

Master rollPay attention to orientation

Document receivingtray

Page 198: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 198/303

23S0007

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

201

u Close the master cover.

o Gently close the document receiving tray.

i Push the master set lever.

23S0008

23S0009

Master cover

Master set lever

Page 199: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 199/303

23S0017

23S0018

23S0019

23S0015

23S0016

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

202

(5) Preparation of Drum

WARNING

¡Do not touch the drum or rollers when you

operate the jog switch.

¡Do not put hands inside machine while it is

operating.

Hands could get caught up or crushed.

q Press the jog switch (drum rotator switch).

Hold down until the drum stops with a beep.

w Open the front cover toward you.

e Lift up the drum securing lever.

While lifting the lever up, pull out the drum

handle toward you, pulling it straight out until it

stops.

Drum securing lever

Front cover

CAUTION¡Hold the drum level and place it on a flat, solid

surface.

¡The stainless screen does not return to the original

state once it is folded. Be careful to handle the

screen.

r Grip the upper drum shaft with your other hand,

and pull the drum out toward you while slightly

lifting the near end of the drum.

Upper drum shaft

t Move the lever with a hand to open and close the

master clump once or twice.

y Hold the drum level and place the drum guide

roller onto the rail in the machine.

Rail

Master clump

Roller

Drum

23S0014

Jog switch

q

w

e

Page 200: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 200/303

23S0020

23S0021

23S0022

23S0014

23S0023

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

203

u Let go of the handle far end of drum, and push

the drum in about 10 cm while slightly lifting 

the near end of the drum.

i Hold the drum level and push it in gently until it

stops.

o Lift the drum securing lever toward you while

pushing the drum in.

!0 Push down the securing lever tightly with the

drum inside the machine.

Drum securing lever

!1 Close the front cover.

Front cover

WARNING

¡Do NOT touch the drum or rollers when you

operate the jog switch.

¡Do NOT put hands inside machine while it is

operating.

Hands could get caught up or crushed.

!2 Press the jog switch (drum rotator switch).

Continue pushing until the drum stops with a

beep.

Jog switch

Page 201: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 201/303

23S0026

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

204

(6) Setting the Ink Pack

q Open the front cover.

w Hold the ink pack holder release lever and pull it

toward you.

e Twist open the cap of the new ink pack.

CAUTION

¡Do not leave an uncapped INK PACK for a

period longer than necessary.

r Insert the ink pack so that the groove on the LIP

fits into the "U" groove of the holder.

Ink pack

Holder

Holder

Ink pack

Front cover

Holder release lever

Ink pack

t Push the ink pack to the set line on the ink pack.

y Push the side of the holder in with the palm of 

your hand.

u Close the front cover.

"U" groove of holder

Front cover

23S0015

23S0024

23S0025

Set line

Page 202: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 202/303

z DUPRINTER Installation Instructionschap.5

205

q Invoke the HELP mode.

While holding down the PRINTING SPEED

ADJUSTMENT keys and simultaneously,

turn the power on.

w Supply ink using HELP04.

Enter <0> <4> from the keypad and then press

the PRINT key.

Drum will begin to rotate while the ink pump

starts operation.After completion of supplying 

ink, drum will stop rotating with continuousbeep sounds.

In general, it takes approx.30 seconds to supply

ink.

e Turn the power OFF and then ON again.

r Perform platemaking and printing of the

document.

For more information, refer to

"Platemaking and printing procedure"in the Instruction Manual.

The image will be light since ink is

not fully spread over the drum

surface. It is not a trouble.

Continuously print approx.20 sheets.

IMPORTANT :

t Once ink is fully spread, check the printed

image.If the density varies between the near and

far areas of paper, make adjustment according to

the "Adjusting Ink Amount".

e When the whole area of paper is darker or

lighter, turn stepwise the Ink Amount

 Adjustment Knob on both sides in the "4" or

"3" direction respectively (3 steps).

2. Adjusting Ink Amount

Setscrew Never loosen!

Setscrew Never loosen!

Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on the near side

(Standard Position)

Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on the far side

(Standard Position)

(7) Supplying Ink and Adjusting Ink

Amount

1. Supplying Ink

(8) If Options are Installed

Optional equipment should be installed AFTER the

machine itself has been installed and test-run to

check that it functions normally. For the procedure

for installing optional equipment, see the

Installation Procedures supplied with it.

q When the near area is darker or lighter, turn

stepwise the Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on

the near side in the "4" or "3" direction

respectively (3 steps).

w When the far area is darker or lighter, turn

stepwise the Ink Amount Adjustment Knob on

the far side in the "4" or "3" direction

respectively (3 steps).

The Ink Amount Adjustment Knob

has a total of 7 positions : 3

positions for each of "4" and "3"

directions as well as a standard

position.When adjusting the image

density, you should print the image

on dozens of sheets to stabilize the

density every time you change it by

every step.

Repeat the above steps until you

get desired print density.

IMPORTANT :

Page 203: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 203/303206

MEMO

Page 204: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 204/303207

z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance.......................208

x Cleaning and Oiling ..................................................208

(1) Cleaning ...............................................................208

(2) Oiling ....................................................................208

c Periodical Maintenance ............................................209

(1) 6-month Periodical Checking ..............................209

(2) Criteria for Replacing the Primary Parts ...........209

6

Chapter 6 Maintenance/Check

Page 205: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 205/303

z Guaranteed Periodical Maintenance x Cleaning and Oilingchap.6

208

zGuaranteed PeriodicalMaintenance

(1) Cleaning

Do not oil the pinch lever bearing section. Clean it.IMPORTANT :

•The serviceman will visit the user periodically after delivery. The maintenance operation described in the

periodical maintenance list is performed and instructs how to follow the operation.

When the serviceman is called by telephone, the following maintenance must be performed after clearing 

the trouble.

1. Cleaning the document.

2. Cleaning the document table glass.3. Cleaning the thermal head.

xCleaning and Oiling

1.Paper shreds:

Clean with a brush or dry cloth.

Clean the mirror and reflection plate in the scanner section with a blower brush.

2.Ink:

Clean with soap.

Oil or grease after ink or paper shreds are removed.

(2) Oiling

2.Gear section:

Grease the gear section after removing paper shreds on the bottom of gear.

1.Bearing section:

Oil the edge surface and bearing sections with oiler, rotating the lever and roller.

Page 206: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 206/303

c Periodical Maintenancechap.6

209

(1) 6-month Periodical Checking

cPeriodical Maintenance

Section to be checked Description Remarks

Shading plate Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth

Glass Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth

Lamp Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth

Reflection mirror Cleaning Remove dust with blower brush

Thermal head Cleaning Clean with a soft and clean cloth (Do not damage the thermal head)

Platen roller Cleaning Remove paper shreds (Do not damage the platen roller)

Sensor Cleaning Remove dust with blower brush

Press roller Cleaning Remove paper shreds

Drum exterior Cleaning Remove ink and paper shreds

Paper feeding section Checking Paper is fed smoothly. Remove paper shreds

Plate making section Checking Paper is fed smoothly. Remove paper shreds

Roller shaft / bearing Oiling Except for the pinch lever bearing section

Gear Greasing

Air pump Greasing

Escape cam Greasing

(2) Criteria for Replacing Primary Parts

No. Item Criterion Remarks

1 Paper feed roller 300,000 sheets or more

2 Paper separator unit 300,000 sheets or more3 Thermal head About 20,000 plates or one year Up to 10 voids

4 Drum unit Printing 1,000,000 sheets or one year Overhaul

5 Air pump Printing 1,000,000 sheets or one year

6 Tape cutter upper/lower blade Cutting 10,000 times or one year

7 Press roller 1,000,000 sheets or one year

8 Lamp 10,000 plates or one year

Page 207: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 207/303210

MEMO

Page 208: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 208/303211

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting

z Troubleshooting Guide ............................................212

1.Countermeasures for the Defective Operation ...212

(1) "LAMP NG" is displayed ....................................213

(2) Lamp does not Light Up ....................................213

(3) "E001" is displayed ............................................214

(4) "E002" is displayed ............................................215

(5) "E008" is displayed ............................................216

(6) "E009" is displayed ............................................216(7) "E0014"(LPU) is displayed ................................216

(8) "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed ........................217

(9) "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed ...................217

(10) Malfunction of Master Feeding Clutch ...........218

(11) Malfunction of Platemaking Stepping Motor .218

(12) "MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed ............219

(13) Malfunction of Roll-up Motor ..........................219

(14) "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed ..................220

(15) "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed ............220

(16) "DOC. TRAY OPEN" is displayed ...................221

(17) "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed ...............221

(18) "EXCHANGE INK" is displayed .....................222

(19) "SET KEYCARD" is displayed ........................222

(20) "DOCUMENT JAM" is displayed,

when power turned on .........223

(21) "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is displayed ................224

(22) "PAPER LEFT JAM" is displayed ...................225

(23) "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" is displayed ............225

(24) Paper Jams in the Paper Feed Side ................226

(25) Paper Jams in the Paper Eject Side ................227

x Error Display .............................................................228

7

Page 209: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 209/303212

1. Countermeasures for the Defective Operation

Massage Remarks No. Page

DOC. TRAY OPEN

DOCUMENT JAM

DRUM NOT SET

EXCHG. EJECT-CORE

EXCHANGE INK

FRONT COVER OPEN

LAMP NG

MAST. EJECT ERROR

MASTER SET MISS

PAPER LEFT JAM

PAPER RIGHT JAM

ROLL MASTER END

SET KEYCARDSET KEYCARD

SET PRINT PAPER

When power turned on

Specification for export

Specification for domestic

(16)

(20)

(8)

(23)

(18)

(15)

(1)

(12)

(9)

(22)

(21)

(17)

(19)

(19)

(14)

222 (English)

222 (Japanese)

221

223

217

225

222

220

213

219

217

225

224

221

220

(3) 214

(4) 215

(5) 216

(6) 216

(7) 216

E001

E002

E008

E009

E014 Machine with LPU connected

Item No. Page

Lamp does not light up

Malfunction of master feeding clutch

Malfunction of platemaking stepping motor

Malfunction of roll-up motor

Paper JAM in the paper eject side

Paper JAM in the paper feed side

(2)

(10)

(11)

(13)

(25)

(24)

213

218

218

219

227

226

zTroubleshooting Guide

¡When the messages listed below are displayed on the LCD or when trouble such as malfunctioning or a paper

 jam occurs, proceed with an inspection following the procedure for the item and take measures accordingly.

Message List

Error item List

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

Page 210: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 210/303213

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(1) "LAMP NG" is displayed

HELP mode H-08  \ see p.247*

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Lamp does not light up 1 NO Refer to “Lamp does not light up”.

ADF cover 2 YES Finish.(Scanner cover)

Mirror 3 YES Install mirror in place.

Main PCB unit

4 YES Replace main PCB unit.

Does lamp light up when power is

turned on for an instant?

Is trouble cleared by closing ADFcover and then turning OFF and ON

or pressing “ALL CLEAR” key?

Is mirror dropped off or broken?

HELP mode(H-08)*: Is CCD photo-

receiving data not less than 26?

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.

2 YES Proceed to procedure 4.

Lamp 3 YES Finish.

Inverter PCB Unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace inverter

PCB unit.

Drive PCB unit 4 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Drive PCB unit 5 YES Check bundled wire and

connectors on primary side and

if necessary replace drive PCB

unit.

Thermal head 6 YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace thermal

head.

Regulated power supply 7 NO Check bundled wire and

connectors on primary side and

if necessary replace regulated

power supply.

Drive PCB unit YES Check bundled wire, connectors

and DC motor and replace drive

PCB unit.

Does voltage between drive PCB unit

CN7-3(+) and CN7-2(GND) show

+24V?

Does lamp light up when drive PCB

unit CN5-1 is short-circuited to GND?

Is trouble cleared by replacing lamp?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN2-1(+) and CN3-

1(GND) show +24V?

Is measured voltage by procedure 1

+24V after drive PCB unit CN6 is

pulled out?

Is measured voltage by procedure 5

+24V after drive PCB unit CN7 is

pulled out?

(2) Lamp does not Light Up

Page 211: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 211/303214

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(3) "E001" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.

Main motor PCB unit 2 YES Finish.Main PCB unit NO Replace main PCB unit.

Drum interferes with body. 3 YES Eliminate interference.

Drive system gear broken 4 YES Check if drive system gear is

or blocked with foreign broken or blocked with foreign

matter. matter and remove cause.

Main PCB unit 5 YES Check bundled wire and

connectors, and if necessary

replace main PCB unit.

Main motor PCB unit 6 YES Finish.

Main motor NO Replace main motor.

Does drum rotate?

Is trouble cleared by replacing mainmotor PCB unit?

Does motor rotate without drum?

Does main motor rotate without the

driving timing belt?

Does main motor rotate at pre-stop

speed if main motor PCB unit CN3-8

is short-circuited to GND?

Is the trouble cleared by replacing

main motor PCB unit?

Page 212: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 212/303215

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(4) "E002" is displayed

Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked

Feed tray operation is

defective 1

Does the elevator motor work when the

chain is removed from the feed tray?YES

Remove the cause of defective operation.

Lean or catch?

2

Check with the HELP modes, H-06, H-

07. Are the elevator top limit sensor

and the elevator bottom limit switch

noraml?

NO

• Follow the procedure 6 when the

elevator top limit sensor is defective.

• Follow the procedure 8 when the

elevator bottom limit sensor is defective.

Regulated power supply 3

Remove the drive PCB Unit CN2.

Measure the voltage between the regu-

lated power supply, CN1-1(+), CN1-2

(GND) with the tester. Is the voltage

+24 V?

NO Replace the regulated power supply.

Elevator motor 4

Measure the voltage between the main

PCB Unit CN3-1 (GND) and CN3-2 (+)

with the tester at the timing of the ele-

vator motor operation. Is the voltage

+24V whether the elevator motor relay

connector is inserted or not?

YES Replace the elevator.

Drive PCB Unit5

Is the cause cleared by replacing the

drive PCB Unit?

YES Finish.

Elevator motor NO Replace the elevator motor.

Main PCB Unit 6

Measure the voltage between the main

PCB Unit CN6-2 (+) and GND with the

tester. Is the voltage of the elevator top

limit sensor 0V at the time of pho-

topassing and 5V at the time of pho-

tointerrupting?

YES Replace the main PCB Unit.

Main PCB Unit7

Measure the voltage between the main

PCB Unit CN6-1 (+) and CN6-3 (GND)

with the tester. Is the voltage +5V?

YES Replace the main PCB Unit.

Elevator top limit sensor YES Replace the elevator top limit sensor.

Elevator bottom limit SW8

Check the elevator bottom limit switch

with the tester. Is the switch turned on

or off normally?

NO Replace the elevator bottom limit SW.

Main PCB Unit YES Replace the main PCB Unit.

HELP mode H-06  \ see p.245*

HELP mode H-07  \ see p.246*

Page 213: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 213/303216

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked

Online set PCB Unit 1Is the cause cleared by replacing the

online set PCB Unit ?YES Finish.

Online code 2 Is the cause cleared by replacing theonline code ?

YES Finish.

IPC I/F PCB Unit3

Is the cause cleared by replacing the

IPC I/F PCB Unit ?

YES Finish.

Main PCB Unit NO Replace the Main PCB Unit.

(5) "E008" is displayed

(6) "E009" is displayed

Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked

Main PCB Unit 1

Use a tester to measure the voltage

between DC regulated power supplyCN2-1(+) and the frame (GND). Is the

voltage 16 - 18V during platemaking

(thermal head ON)?

YESChech the bundled wire and connector.

If OK, replace the main PCB Unit.

Thermal head 2Disconnect all the thermal head con-

nectors, and measure the voltage in 1)

above. Is the voltage 16V approx.?

YESChech the bundled wire and connector.

If OK, replace the thermal head.

Drive PCB Unit3

Disconnect DC regulated power supply

CN2 and drive PCB CN7, and measure

the voltage in 1) above. Is the voltage

16V approx.?

YESChech the bundled wire and connector.

If OK, replace the drive PCB Unit.

Regulated power supply NO Replace the regulated power supply.

(7) "E014" is displayed

Cause/Detective section Procedures Result CountermeasureItems to be checked

1Execute printing in the regular mode.

Does the guide roller drive motor turn?YES Follow the procedure 5.

Thermal head

press motor YESCheck the bundled wire. If OK, replace

the guide roller drive motor.2

Execute printing in the regular mode,

and measure the voltage between the

drive PCB unit's CN4-9 (+) and CN4-10

(GND). Is the voltage +24V?

Mini drive PCB unit NO

Check the bundled wire and connectors

between the drive PCB unit's CN10 and

the mini drive PCB unit's CN1. If OK,

replace the main PCB unit.

Regulated power supply

Guide roller sensor 5Replace the guide roller sensor. Is the

problem solved?YES Finish.

Measure the voltage between the DC

regulated power supply's CN2-1 (+)

and CN3-1 (GND).Is the voltage +24V?

3 Replace the regulated power supply.NO

Drive PCB unit

4Replace the drive PCB unit. Is the prob-

lem solved?

Finish.YES

(only in machine with Long Paper Unit connected)

Page 214: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 214/303

(8) "DRUM NOT SET" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Drum setting. 1 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit 2 YES Check if drum SW (MS4) isinstalled in place and replace

main PCB unit.

Drum SW 3 NO Replace drum SW (MS4).

Main PCB unit YES Check if drum SW (MS4) is

installed in place and replace

main PCB unit.

Is trouble cleared by setting drum

again?

Does drum SW (MS4) checked byHELP mode (H-08)* prove to be nor-

mal?

Does drum SW (MS4) checked by

volt-ohm-milliammeter prove to be

normal?

HELP mode H-08  \ see p.247*

(9) "MASTER SET MISS" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

End mark sensor PCB 1 NO Adjust VR for end mark sensor

unit (PS3) by HELP mode (H-13)*. If un-

able,replace end mark sensor

PCB unit.

VR must be adjusted after

replacement of end mark sensor

PCB unit.

Master feeding clutch

2NO Refer to “(10) Malfunction of master

(CL1) feeding clutch (CL1)”.

Platemaking stepping 3 NO Refer to “(11) Malfunction of

motor (PM2) platemaking stepping motor

(PM2)”.

Cutter unit 4 NO Replace cutter unit.

Static electricity 5 YES Remove static-eliminating brush.

Master 6 YES Finish.

Transfer path NO Remove any foreign matter in

transfer path.

IMPORTANT:

Has “MASTER SET MISS” actually

occurred?

Does master feeding clutch (CL1)

operate normally?

Does platemaking stepping motor

(PM2) operate normally?

Is master cut normally?

Is static-eliminating brush on master

feeding unit damaged or deteriorated?

Is trouble cleared by replacing mas-

ter?

HELP mode H-13  \ see p.252*

 \ see page 218

217

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

 \ see page 218

Page 215: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 215/303218

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(10) Malfunction of Master Feeding Clutch

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Regulated power supply 1 NO Replace regulated power supply.

Master feeding clutch 2 YES Check wiring and replace master

(CL1) feeding clutch.

Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1

(GND) show 24V?

Does voltage between drive PCB unit

CN4-7 (+) and -8 (GND) show 24V

when master feeding clutch is turned

on?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

(11) Malfunction of Platemaking Stepping Motor

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Load on drive system 1 YES Finish.

Regulated power supply 2 NO Replace regulated power supply.

Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is trouble cleared by adjusting tension

of the master feeding unit timing belt

or supplying oil to bearing?

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1

(GND) show 24V?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

Page 216: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 216/303219

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(12) "MAST. EJECT ERROR" is displayed

(13) Malfunction of Roll-up Motor

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 YES Proceed to procedure 5.

Foreign material or dirt on 2 YES Remove any foreign matter andsensors. clean.

Master ejection sensor 3 YES Finish.

photo-receiving (PS13)

Master ejection sensor 4 YES Finish.

photo-emitting PCB

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Roll-up motor (M4) 5 NO Refer to “(13) Malfunction of roll-up

motor (M4)”.

Master clump dirty. 6 YES Clean master clump section.

Master ejection box 7 YES Replace any damaged stripper

finger or springs.

Drum master ejection 8 NO Adjust the drum master ejection

stop position stop position.

C mode YES Check and adjust C mode.

Has “MAST. EJECT ERROR” actually

occurred?

Are there any foreign matter or dirtbetween the master ejection sensor

photo-receiving (PS13) and the mas-

ter ejection sensor photo-emitting

PCB?

Is trouble cleared by replacing the

master ejection sensor photo-receiv-

ing (PS13)?

Is trouble cleared by replacing the

master ejection sensor photo-emitting

PCB?

Does roll-up motor (M4) rotate nor-

mally?

Is the master clump section dirty with

ink or oil?

Is stripper finger or springs damaged?

Is the drum master ejection stop posi-

tion within reference value?

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Roll-up motor 1 YES Replace roll-up motor (M4).

Regulated power supply 2 NO Replace regulated power supply.

Drive PCB unit 3 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Does voltage between drive PCB unit

CN4-14 (+) and -13 (GND) show 24V

when roll-up motor (M4) is operated

with HELP mode (H-18)*?

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN2-1 (+) and CN3-1

(GND) show 24V?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

HELP mode H-18  \ see p.258*

Page 217: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 217/303220

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(14) "SET PRINT PAPER" is displayed

(15) "FRONT COVER OPEN" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Paper sensor (MS7) 1 NO Adjust paper sensor (MS7)

position position.

Paper sensor (MS7) 2 NO Replace paper sensor (MS7).

Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is actuator for paper sensor (MS7) is

pressed when paper tray is set?

When paper sensor (MS7) is checkedwith volt-ohm-milliammeter, does it

CLOSE if actuator is pressed and

OPEN if released?

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Front cover SW (MS5)

1NO Adjust front cover SW (MS5)

position position.

Front cover SW (MS5) 2 NO Replace front cover SW (MS5).

Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is front cover SW (MS5) pressed

when front cover is set?

When front cover SW (MS5) is

checked with volt-ohm-milliammeter,

does it OPEN if switch is pressed

(front cover open) and CLOSE if

released (front cover close)?

Page 218: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 218/303221

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(16) "DOC. TRAY OPEN" is displayed

(17) "ROLL MASTER END" is displayed

HELP mode H-13  \ see p.252*

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Document receiving tray 1 NO Adjust the document receiving traySW (MS3) position. SW (MS3) position.

Document receiving tray 2 NO Replace the document receiving

SW (MS3) tray SW (MS3).

Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is the document receiving tray SW(MS3) pressed when document

receiving tray is closed?When the document receiving tray

SW (MS3) is checked with volt-ohm-

milliammeter, does it CLOSE if switch

is pressed and OPEN if released?

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Adjustment for the 1 YES Finish.

end mark sensor PCB

unit (PS3).

End mark sensor PCB 2 YES Finish.

unit (PS3)

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is trouble cleared by adjusting the

end mark sensor PCB unit (PS3) by

HELP mode (H-13)*?

Is trouble cleared by replacing the end

mark sensor PCB unit (PS3)?

Page 219: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 219/303222

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(18) "EXCHANGE INK" is displayed

HELP mode H-28  \ see p.267*

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Ink 1 NO Replace ink pack.

Setting method of ink 2 NO Set ink pack properly and teach

pack. user how to set one.

Main PCB unit 3 YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Ink detection PCB unit 4 YES Replace Ink detection PCB unit.

5 NO Proceed to procedure 7.

Foreign material in ink 6 YES Finish.

pump

Ink pump NO Replace ink pump.

Regulated power supply 7 NO Replace regulated power supply.

Ink motor (M2) 8 YES Replace ink motor (M2).

Drive PCB unit 9 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Is enough ink left in ink pack?

Is ink pack set properly?

Is LED on the ink detection PCB unit

lit?

Is enough ink left in drum? (Has ink

reached detection needle for the ink

detection PCB unit?)

Does ink pump operate?

Is trouble cleared by cleaning inside of

ink pump?

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN4-1 (+) and -1 (GND)

show 24V?

Does voltage between drive PCB unit

CN2-1 and -2 show 24V?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

(19) "SET KEYCARD" is displayed specification for export

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 NO Proceed to procedure 5.

How to use. 2 YES Finish.

Keycard counter 3 NO Connect connector properly.

connector

HELP setting. 4 NO Set HELP mode (H-28)* set to

“***0”.

YES Proceed to procedure 6.

HELP setting. 5 NO Set HELP mode (H-28)* set to

“***1”.

Main PCB unit 6 YES Finish.

Keycard counter NO Replace keycard counter.

Is the keycard counter connector con-

nected?

Is trouble cleared by inserting depart-

ment card as keycard?

Is the keycard counter connector con-

nected properly?

Is HELP mode (H-28)* set to

“***0”?

Is HELP mode(H-28)* set to

“***1”?

Does voltage between main PCB unit

CN6-3 and GND about 5V?

Page 220: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 220/303223

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(20) "DOCUMENT JAM" is displayed, when power turned on

HELP mode H-08  \ see p.247*

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 NO Proceed to procedure 7.

Separator, paper feed 2 NO Clean separator and the paper

roller feed roller. If necessary, replace.

Main PCB unit 3 YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Main PCB unit 4 YES Replace main PCB unit.

Scanner JAM sensor 5 NO Replace the scanner JAM sensor.

Document position sensor 6 NO Replace the document position

sensor.

Gears 7 YES Replace gears.

Regulated power supply 8 NO Replace regulated power supply.

Drive PCB unit 9 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit 10 YES Finish.

Scanner stepping motor NO Replace scanner stepping motor

(PM1) (PM1).

Does the document feed roller rotate?

Is document fed by separator and the

paper feed roller?

When document sensor 1 (PS1) is

checked with HELP mode (H-08)*, is

0 displayed if sensor is photo passing

and is 1 displayed if photointerrupted?

Does voltage between main PCB unit

CN13-2 and GND show HIGH value

(about 4.5V) if sensor is photointer-

rupted and LOW if photo passing?

Does the sensor indicate "1" when

there is paper and "0" when there is

no paper?

Does the sensor indicate "10 or lower"

when there is paper and "255" when

there is no paper if it is checked by

HELP mode (H-08)*?

Are gears broken?

Does voltage between regulated

power supply CN4-4 (+) and -1 (GND)

show 24V?

Is trouble cleared by replacing drive

PCB unit?

Is trouble cleared by replacing mainPCB unit?

Page 221: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 221/303224

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(21) "PAPER RIGHT JAM" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Paper 1 NO Use paper conforming to

specification.

2 YES Proceed to procedure 7.

Paper jammed 3 YES Refer to “(25) Paper JAM in

paper eject side”.

Master ejection box is 4 YES Finish.

not closed.

Dirt or foreign material 5 YES Clean the photo-emitting and

on sensor photo-receiving sections of JAM

sensor.

Sensor position 6 YES Finish.

JAM sensor 7 YES Replace JAM sensor photo-

photo-emitting PCB emitting PCB.

JAM sensor NO Replace JAM sensor photo-

photo-receiving PCB receiving PCB.

Stop/JAM detection 8 NO Adjust position of the stop/JAM

position sensor (PS6) detection position sensor. If

necessary, replace.

Main PCB unit YES Replace main PCB unit.

Is printing paper long within specified

value?

When JAM sensor 1 (PS12) ischecked with HELP mode (H-08)*, is

0 displayed if sensor is photopassing

and is 1 displayed if photointerrupted?

Is paper really jammed at master ejec-

tion section?

Is trouble cleared by properly closing

the master ejection box?

Is there any dirt or foreign material on

the JAM sensor photo-emitting or

photo-receiving section?

Is trouble cleared by adjusting the

JAM detection sensor position?

Is 0 displayed by directing another

light to the photo-receiving section of

the document sensor photo-receiving

PCB when JAM sensor 1 (PS12) is

checked with HELP mode (H-06)*?

When drum is checked with HELP

mode (H-06)* while rotating slowly,

does the stop/JAM detection position

sensor (PS6) display 0 or 1 according

to edge of photointerrupter?

 \ see page 227

HELP mode H-06  \ see p.245*

HELP mode H-08  \ see p.247*

Page 222: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 222/303225

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

(22) "PAPER LEFT JAM" is displayed

HELP mode H-06  \ see p.245*

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

1 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit 2 YES Replace the main PCB unit.

P roller sensor (PS9) 3 YES Finish.

position

P roller sensor (PS9) 4 YES Finish.

Main PCB unit NO Check the bundled wire and

connectors and replace the main

PCB unit.

Is trouble cleared by checking, refer-

ring to “(24) Paper jams in the paper

feed side”?

When P roller sensor (PS9) is

checked with HELP mode (H-06)*, is

0 displayed if press is turned ON and

1 displayed if OFF?

If no problem is detected by the

check with HELP mode (H-06)*,

result on printing may differ

depending on speed or load.

Recommended is to follow proce-

dure 3 and 4 below for further

check.Is the trouble cleared by adjusting P

roller sensor (PS9) position?

Is the trouble cleared by replacing P

roller sensor (PS9)?

NOTE:

 \ see page 226

(23) "EXCHG. EJECT-CORE" is displayed

Cause/Defective section Procedures Item to be checked Result Countermeasure

Core 1 YES Insert new core.

Core full SW (MS8) 2 YES Adjust actuator of core full SW

actuator (MS8).

Core full SW (MS8) 3 NO Replace core full SW (MS8).

Main PCB unit YES Check bundled wire and

connectors and replace main

PCB unit.

Core is not included or core is full?

Is core full SW (MS8) pressed when

empty core is installed?

Does core full SW (MS8) tested volt-

ohm-milliammeter prove to be nor-

mal?

Page 223: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 223/303226

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

Causes Symptoms Countermeasure

Printing paper not suit-

able

• If paper is too thick, it won’t be likely fed. If too thin, dou-

ble sheets may be fed.

• Paper not clearly cut: 2 sheets still adhere to each

other.

• Much paper scraps may deteriorate the paper feed

roller and separator performance.

Explain causes to user. Have user

change to the paper conforming to

specifications.

Dirt / foreign matter in

transfer path

• Paper gets stuck in transfer path, causing creasing and

tearing.

Remove any dirt or foreign matter.

Incorrect paper feed path

pressure

• If pressure on paper is insufficient, paper will not be fed.

• If pressure on paper is excessive, double sheets will be

fed.

Explain to users how to select cor-

rect pressure for paper.

Worn paper feed roller • Paper may not be fed. Replace paper feed roller.

Paper separator unit gap • If gap is too large, separator unit will rattle in direction of

paper transfer path, causing double sheets to be fed.

• If gap is too small, paper separator unit cannot follow

angle change due to paper feed shaft up-down move-

ment, which may cause double-sheet or slanted feed,

and creasing.

Perform paper separator unit gap

adjustment.

Paper separator unit • Wear, or adhesion of paper scraps causes deterioration

in separating performance, resulting in double-sheet

feed.

Clean separating surfaces. If any

trouble exists, replace. Perform sep-

arator unit gap adjustment on new

unit.

Separation pressure • If pressure is very low, no paper will be fed. Perform separation pressure adjust-

ment.

Paper tray upper position

limit

• Paper slant is large, causing creases.

• During printing, paper feed errors often occur immedi-

ately before or after paper tray rises.

Perform paper feed tray upper limit

sensor adjustment.

Paper feed amount • If amount is too short, paper slant cannot be corrected,

printing position may not be uniform, or paper may not

be fed.

• If amount is too long, loop becomes too large, causing

paper to buckle up between paper feed roller and timing

roller, resulting in feed error.

Perform paper feed amount adjust-

ment.

Paper feed clutch • Clutch slippage will reduce paper feed amount.

• If clutch does not disengage properly, the paper feed

segment gear will not return correctly, leading to

reduced feed amount.

(See “Paper feed amount” above.)

Replace paper feed cluch.

Guide roller pressure &

timing

• If Guide roller pressure is insufficient, paper will not be

gripped properly, and timing roller will not assure con-

stant feed amount. As a result, printing position will not

be uniform. In the worst case, no paper will reach drum.

• If there is a gap between Guide roller and the timing

roller, paper slant cannot be corrected.

Perform escape amount adjustment

and escape timing adjustment.

Timing roller • If the timing roller clutch slips, feed amount will not be

constant. As a result, printing position will not be uni-

form. In the worst case, no paper will reach drum.

• If the timing roller clutch does not disengage properly,

the paper feed segment gear will not return correctly,

leading to reduced and unstable feed amount. As a

result, printing position will not be uniform. In the worst

case, no paper will reach drum.

Clean timing roller clutch . Replace

if necessary.

Incorrect signal lever

operation

• Paper may be damaged in the part of leading edge that

touches the signal lever. In the worst case, paper may

stick to the signal lever.

Clean bearing unit. Check that signal

lever moves smoothly.

(24) Paper Jams in the Paper Feed Side

 \ see page 171

 \ see page 171

 \ see page 172

 \ see page 172

HELP mode H-67 / 291 page

 \ see page 174

Page 224: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 224/303227

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

Causes Symptoms Countermeasure

Printing paper not suit-

able

• If paper is too thin, it will stick to drum and scrunch up.

• If grain of paper is sideways relative to transfer direction, paper will

crunch up, or get jammed on the paper receiving plate.

• If paper curl upward, it will likely scrunch up. If curl downward, it will

likely get jammed on the paper receiving plate.

Explain causes to users. Have user

change to paper conforming to

specifications.

Image of document • If set-solid exists near leading edge of paper, paper will likely scrunch

up.

• If set-solid is blasted to one side of paper, paper will not be ejected in

a straight line. As a result, ejected paper will be disorderly piled and

likely jam on the paper receiving plate.

• Adjust leading edge margin to

about 10 mm. (Too long margin

will cause adverse results.)

• Explain causes to users. If possi-

ble, have user change position for

set-solid.

Static electricity • If ambient air is dry, static electricity may cause disordered piles or

scrunch-up of paper.

• Explain causes to users. Have user desist

from excessive use of A/C or heating.

• If possible, have user take anti-dryness

measures including humidifiers.

Leading edge margin • If leading edge margin is not correct, scrunch-up of paper will likely

result.

Scrunch-up of paper may also result if the margin is too long.

IMPORTANT:

Perform printing position sensors

adjustment.

Guide roller pressure &

timing

• If Guide roller pressure is insufficient, paper will not be gripped proper-

ly, causing less feed amount determined by timing roller, or disap-

pearance of leading edge margin. This results in the paper scrunch-

up.

Perform escape amount and escape

timing adjustments.

Timing roller clutch • Any slippage of the timing roller clutch will reduce feed amount and

eliminate leading edge margin. This results in the paper scrunch-up.

• If the timing roller clutch does not disengage properly, the timing roller

segment gear will not return correctly, causing reduction of feed

amount or disappearance of leading edge margin. As a result, paperwill scrunch up.

Clean timing roller clutch. Repair if

necessary.

Paper stripper finger • If timing is too low, or the gap between drum and the leading edge of

paper is too large, paper stripper finger will not enter into the gap,

causing the paper scrunch-up.

Perform paper stripper finger adjust-

ment.

Air • If sufficient air is not delivered from the tip of the paper stripper finger,

it will not lift the leading edge of paper off drum. Scrunch-up of paper

will result.

• Check if the hole in the fingers tipis blocked by foreign matter.

• Check pipes for kinks or discon-nections.

• Check valves and O-rings on theair pump.

Paper ejection belt • If the speed of the paper ejection belt, if cannot eject the paper onto

the paper receiving plate with sufficient force.

As a result, there will be paper jams in the vicinity of the dischargeport. (Sometimes the trailing edge of the paper gets caught in the jam-

ming sensor and a paper jamming error is displayed.)

If the belt is broken or stretched,

replace it.

Paper ejection fan unit • If the suction force of the fan drops, it will not be able to blow the

paper (which has risen clear of the ejection belt) onto the paper

receiving plate with be paper jams in the vicinity of the discharge port.

(Sometimes the trailing edge of the paper gets caught in the jamming

sensor and a paper jamming error is displayed.)

Clean the fan. If it still does not work

properly, replace it.

Ink • Too much ink transferred to paper will likely cause scrunch-up of

paper.

• Perform ink volume adjustment of drum.

• Explain user that ink transfer volume

increases immediately after paper scrunch-

up, and advise user to restart printing at

standard speed, then.

 \ see page 182

 \ see page 180

 \ see page 174

 \ see page 175

(25) Paper Jams in Paper Eject Side

Page 225: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 225/303228

zTroubleshooting Guidechap.7

This machine has a self-diagnosis function. The

state of the machine is always checked with this

function and is displayed with code on the control

panel. The following are the code display, cause and

detection timing.

• While the LPU driving signal is lit, the LPU escape

sensor cannot detect the edge for 2 seconds.

• The regulated power supply is defective.

• The mini drive PCB is defective.• The guide roller driving motor is defective.

• The guide roller sensor(LPU escape timing) is

defective.

• The main PCB unit is defective.

E014

Code display Cause Detection timing

E001• The main motor (M1) is defective.• The main motor PCB Unit is defective.

• The main PCB Unit is defective.

• The encoder sensor (PS7) is defective.

• While the drum rotation signal is lit, the encoder sen-

sor (PS7) cannot detect the edge for 1 second.

E002

• The elevator motor (M2) is defective.

• The elevator top limit sensor (PS9) is defective.

• The elevator bottom limit switch (MS6) is defective.

• The drive PCB is defective.

- The main PCB Unit is defective.

• The elevator operation is defective.

• The elevator does not reach the top limit for 30 sec-

onds after the elevator motor (M2) up signal is lit.

• The elevator does not reach the bottom limit for 30

seconds after the elevator motor (M2) down signal

is lit.

E004

• The lamp is defective.

• The invertor unit is defective.• The CCD is defective.

• Main PCB unit is defective.

• In the lamp lighting check, amount of light received

by CCD does not reach regulation value. (Performthe lamp lighting check once only, with the power

turned on.)

E008• The I/F PCB unit is defective.

• IPC I/F PCB unit is defective.

• During on-line platemaking, communication error

occurs between main PCB unit and I/F PCB unit.

E009• The regulated power supply is defective.

• The thermal head PCB is defective.

• The thermal head is defective.

• At start of platemaking, thermal head drive voltage

does not reach regulation value.

xError Display

Code display

LCD panel

E 1 1 1

Page 226: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 226/303229

Chapter 8 HELP Mode

Pz HELP Mode List .........................................................230

x Overview ....................................................................234

c HELP Mode Functions and

Operation Procedures .............................235

(1) Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes ......235

(2) Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions................235¡HELP Mode Descriptions.....................................236

8

Page 227: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 227/303230

z Help mode Listchap.8

z HELP Mode List

HELPMode No.

Description Classification Page

H-00(1) Display of ROM versions

(2) ROM version upgrading

ROM version

displays/upgrading

(1) 236

(2) 237

H-01(1) Display and adjustment of print speeds(2) Initialization of print speeds(3) Function testing of paper feed clutch

Adjustmentt /specificationsettingFunction testing

(1) 238(2) 239

(3) 240

H-02 (1) Function testing of elevator motor Function testing 241

H-03 (1) Function testing of TAPE CLUSTER Function testing 242

H-04 (1) Function testing of ink replenishment Function testing 243

H-05

(1) Checking of condition of master ejection sensor and other sensors

listed below¡Master ejection sensor¡Paper feed sensor¡Top/Bottom limit sensor, Top/Bottom center sensor

¡ADF cover switch, Feed tray descend switch, Jog switch (drum

rotation switch), Master cover switch, Master lever switch, Elevator

lower limit switch, Paper sensor, Drum cover switch

 

Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

244

H-06

(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡Drum master attachment /detachment position sensor ,

Paper ejection jam sensor , Drum stop/paper ejection jamPaper sensing position sensor, Press roll sensor

¡Encoder sensor , Elevator top limit sensor, A/C mode sensor,B mode sensor

Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

245

H-07

(1) Checking of condition of switches listed below:Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

246

H-08(1) Checking of condition of sensors/swtches listed below:

¡Document sensor, Scanner JAM sensor, Document position sensor¡Drum switch, Master roll Full switch, Top cover open/closed detection switch

Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

247

H-09(1) Checking of master attachment position, jam sensing position,

master detachment position and drum stop positionFunction testing 248

H-10(1) Function testing of lamp

(2) Function testing of ADF clutchesFunction testing

(1)249

(1)252

(2)249

(2)253

H-11(1) Display of document darkness values / scanner test

(for use in factory checks)Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

250

H-12 (1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head and main PCB unitsynchronized signals

Function testing

Function testing

251

H-13(1) Check the condition of the end mark sensor and master position

sensor

(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch

  Sensor/switch conditiondisplay

Page 228: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 228/303231

z Help mode Listchap.8

HELPMode No.

Description Classification Page

H-14

(1) Platemaking total counter display

(2) Resetting of count of total plates made in user mode Total counts

(1) 254

(2) 254

H-20(1) Function testing of clump motor and clump position sensing

(A/B /C mode position)Function testing 260

H-23 (1) Setting of photograph mode document sensing darknessAdjustment/specificationsetting

262

H-24 (1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinal R / E of scannerAdjustment/specificationsetting

263

H-25 (1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinal R / E of scanner Adjustment/specificationsetting 264

H-26(1) Compensation of document darkness white level in photograph

modeAdjustment/specificationsetting

265

H-27 (1) Initialization of all HELP mode settingsAdjustment/specificationsetting

266

H-28(1) Setting : TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence

Buzzer selection

KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification

Adjustment/specificationsetting

267

H-29 (1) Adjustment of paper infeed amountAdjustment/specificationsetting

268

H-30(1) Test pattern (all shading sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)

platemaking and printing Function testing 269

H-31 (1) Setting of number of pre-print sheetsAdjustment/specificationsetting

270

H-32(1) Setting : Confidential safeguard function

First print speed

Master ejection error sensing

Adjustment/specificationsetting

271

H-33 (1) Compensation of document darkness white level in text modeAdjustment/specificationsetting

272

4

Function testing

4H-21 (Not used)

H-22(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amount for

platemaking sideAdjustment/specificationsetting

261

H-19(1) Printing total counter display

(2) Resetting of count of total sheets printed in user modeTotal counts (1) 259

(2) 259

H-18 (1) Function testing of roll-up motor Function testing 258

H-17 (1) Function testing of cutter motor

H-16 (1) Correction of platemaking start position during online platemakingAdjustment /specificationsetting

256

257

H-15 (1) Function testing of ink motor Function testing 255

Page 229: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 229/303232

z Help mode Listchap.8

HELPMode No.

Description Classification Page

H-40(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner is used

Setting of platemaking area (sub-scanning direction)

H-41(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting

Setting of repeat count displayAdjustment/specification

setting

Adjustment/specification

setting

277

H-45 (Not used)

H-46 (Not used)

H-47 (Not used)

H-48 (Not used)

H-49 (Not used)

H-50 (1) Setting of text mode document sensing darknessAdjustment/specification

setting281

H-51 (1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemakingAdjustment/specification

setting282

H-52 (1) Setting of online conditionsAdjustment/specificationsetting

283

H-53(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side) platemaking start position

for online platemakingAdjustment/specification

setting285

H-42(1) Setting of paper selection specification

Setting of platemaking area (main-scanning direction)Adjustment/specification

setting278

280

H-43

Adjustment/specification

setting

Adjustment/specification

setting

H-44 (1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking

(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy

H-37 (1) Adjustment of platemaking start position when scanner is usedAdjustment/specification

setting275

276

279

H-39 (Not used) 4 4

4 4

4 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

H-38 (Not used) 4 4

H-34 (Not used) 4 4

H-35 (1) Adjustment of scanner leading edge sensing positionAdjustment/specification

setting273

H-36 (1) Adjustment of scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing positionAdjustment/specification

setting274

Page 230: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 230/303233

z Help mode Listchap.8

HELPMode No.

Description Classification Page

H-60 (Not used)

(Not used)

H-61 (1) Selection of LCD specificationAdjustment/specificationsetting

288

H-62

H-63 (Not used)

H-64 (1) Buzzer (tone) settingAdjustment/specification

Setting289

H-66(1) Setting : Clump opening/closing timing of when a master is attached

Loop sensor ON/OFF

Paper size mode (long size)

Adjustment/specification

Setting290

4

H-56 (1) Setting for selecting manipulation language

H-57 (1) Setting of online conditionsAdjustment/specification

Setting283

H-58 (Not used) 4 4

4

4

4

4

4

4

44

44

4

H-59 (Not used)

H-54 (Not used)

H-55

(1) Setting : Ink check at printing start

Cutting operation mode for master cuttingInterlocks

Adjustment/specification

Setting

Adjustment/specification

Setting

286

287

4 4

H-71 (Not used)

44(Not used)

44(Not used)

44(Not used)

44(Not used)

H-72

H-70 (1) Option setting 1

Adjustment/specification

Setting 294

H-73

H-74

H-75

H-76 (1) Document darkness correction for text/photograph modeAdjustment/specification

Setting295

H-68 (1) Setting of paper feed timing

H-69 (1) Setting of modelAdjustment/specification

Setting293

H-67 (1) Setting of paper feed lengthAdjustment/specification

Setting

Adjustment/specification

Setting

291

292

H-65 (Not used)

Page 231: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 231/303

Page 232: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 232/303235

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

c HELP Mode Functions and Operation Procedures

(1) Basic Procedure for Accessing HELP Modes

(2) Guide to the HELP Mode Descriptions

q During use of the DUPRINTER: first put the machine into the

standby state, then turn the Power switch OFF.

wSimultaneously press and hold down the and PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys, and turn the Power switch ON with

those keys held down. After about 2 seconds, a beep-beep-beep

tone will sound, and the HELP mode display will appear.

eUsing the numeric keys, enter the number of the HELP mode you

want to access.

Example: To access HELP mode H-00, enter [0], [0].

¡Alternatively, the and PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT

keys may be used to select the HELP mode number.

rPress the PRINT key. The HELP mode specified ine will be

accessed, and either the initial value (value set at factory), or the

currently set value, for the mode will be displayed.

From this point on, follow the procedure given below for the

particular mode accessed.

The descriptions of each HELP mode given on the following pages

are laid out as follows:

HELP mode number

References

to related

pages

LC displayfor function

Operation

procedure for

individual

functions

Main functions

NOTE :

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.7

1. Functions

(1) Tape cluster function test

(1) Testing the tape cluster's functioning

q Access HELP mode H-03, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the TEST PRINT key. The tape feed motor

will run, and feed out the tape, for as long as the key is held down.

T

2. Operation procedure

H-03 (1)Function testingHELP mode

H - 0 3

Mode number flashes

 \See page 293

For removal

For desccription of operation

 \See page 150

 \See page 195

(2) Stacker rise/descent motor function testing

Function category

H E L P S E L E C T 0 0

Mode number flashes

V 1 . 1 1 O P 1 V 1 . 1 1

Page 233: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 233/303236

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Display of ROM versions¡ Displays version of the main PCB unit's ROM (U12).

¡ Displays version of the I/F PCB unit.

¡ROM version for I/F PCB unit is displayed only when connected with

the computer.

(2) ROM version upgrading¡

 Allows upgrading of the main PCB unit's ROM (U12).

(1) Displaying ROM versions

q Access HELP mode H-00, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

Displays version of the ROM.

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedure

H-00 (1) ROM version displaysHELP mode

Main PCB unit

¡ HELP Mode Descriptions

IMPORTANT :

¡Displaying ROM version

I/F PCB unit

V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1

Page 234: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 234/303237

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

uPress the PRINT key.Copying will begin, and the message "---COPYING---" will appear in

the LCD panel. Copying takes about 40 seconds. When it is

complete, the new ROM version will be displayed.

¡DO not turn off the power while "---COPYING- --" is displayed. If you do

you will have to repeat the copying operation from the beginning.

IMPORTANT :

(2) Upgrading of ROM version

qDuring use of the DUPRINTER: first put the machine into the

standby state, then turn the Power switch OFF.

wSwitch on only No.1 of SW1 on the main PCB unit.

¡Never turn on No.2 through No.4 of SW1.

eInsert a master ROM into the socket of the main PCB unit's U12

ROM.

IMPORTANT :

rSimultaneously press and hold down the and PRINTING

SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys, and turn the Power switch ON with

those keys held down.

tPress the [0] numeric key twice (to access HELP mode H-00).

yPress the PRINT key.

H-00 (2) ROM version upgradingHELP mode

iTurn the Power switch OFF.

oRemove the master ROM from the socket of the main PCB unit's

U12 ROM.

!0Set switch No. 1 of the SW1 switches to OFF.

Mode number flashes

ROM version is displayed

Upgraded version isdisplayed

¡Main PCB unit

Turn No. 1 of SW1 from OFF to ON

Insert master ROM

Turn No. 1 of SW1 from ON to OFF

Remove master ROM

H E L P S E L E C T 0 0

- - - C O P Y I N G - - -

V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1

V 1 . 1 1 0 p 1 V 1 . 1 1

Page 235: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 235/303238

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Display and adjustment of print speeds¡Display and adjustment of print speeds (pre-stop speed, jog speed

and speeds 1-3)

* The pre-stop speed is adjusted by means of the main motor PCB

unit's variable resistor (VR).

H-01 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

Adjusting of Printing Speeds 1-3

 \See page 192

Pre-stop Speeds Adjustment

 \See page 191

¡ Jog speedPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.

¡ Pre-stop speed

Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.

eSelect the item speed you want to adjust¡ To select the print speed:

Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.

(1) Adjusting speeds and memorizing the adjusted values

q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wSelect the speed you want to adjust.

¡ Speeds 1-3Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the TEXT item. Then use the and

PRINTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT keys to select one of  speeds 1

through 3.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedure

STD 

1st 2nd 3rd speed

(2) Initialization of print speeds

1 1 1 r p m

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 298

(3) Paper feed clutch function testing

Page 236: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 236/303

(2) Initializing speed settings (returning settings to the

default settings prior to adjustment at factory)

After initialization, the speeds must be readjusted.

q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress the [=] and CLEAR keys. The settings will be

initialized.

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

C

 \See page 235

239

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-01 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

rUse the FUNCTION SWITCH key and SELECT key to

adjust the speed value.

Speed

Pre-stop

JOG

1st.

2nd.

3rd.

* The print speed's pre-stop speed and JOG speed are adjusted by means of

the main motor PCB unit's variable resistor (VR), not using the FUNCTION

SWITCH and SELECT keys.

Adjustment standard (rpm)Print speed

(4 – 6*)

16

60

78 – 82

120

tTo display or adjust other another speed(s), repeat stepswthroughr.

yPress the STOP key. The newly adjusted value(s) will be

memorized, and the HELP mode selection display will reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

 \See page 191

Mode number flashes

H E L P S E L E C T 0 1

IMPORTANT :

Page 237: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 237/303240

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-01 (3) Function testingHELP mode

(3) Testing the paper feed clutch's functioning

¡Call HELP mode (H-02) in advance, set the Paper tray to the upper

most position by keep pressing the FUNCTION SWITCH key.

q Access HELP mode H-01, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

The drum rotates.

wPress the TEST PRINT key.

Proceed with the paper feed operation.

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

T

 \See page 235

IMPORTANT :

 \See page (H-02 qwe )

Page 238: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 238/303241

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

H-02 (1) Function testingHELP mode

2. Operation procedure

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 300

(1) Elevator motor function testing

(1) Testing the elevator motor's functioning

q Access HELP mode H-02, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The

elevator motor will run, making the paper tray rise, for as long as

the key is held down.

eTo stop the elevator motor, either release the FUNCTION SWITCH

key, or de-obstruct the elevator upper limit sensor's light

beam.

rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The elevator motor will

run, making the paper tray descend, for as long as the key is held

down.

tTo stop the elevator motor, either release the SELECT key, or

alter the elevator lower limit switch's condition from closed to

open.

yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

 \See page 235

Page 239: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 239/303242

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Tape cluster function test

(1) Testing the tape cluster's functioning

q Access HELP mode H-03, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the TEST PRINT key. The tape feed motor

will run, and feed out the tape, for as long as the key is held down.

eRelease the TEST PRINT key. The tape cutting solenoid will

be activated, and the tape will be cut.

T

T

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedure

H-03 (1)Function testingHELP mode

For description of operation

 \See page 119

: T A P E T E S T

Page 240: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 240/303243

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Ink replenishment function testing¡Tests functioning of ink replenishment by sensing the ink

supplied.

(1) Testing the functioning of ink replenishment

q Access HELP mode H-04, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the drum will rotate, and the

ink pump run, until the ink sensing PCB unit's LED lamp lights to

signal that ink supply is OK. When this lamp lights, a buzzer

sounds and the drum and ink pump stop.

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedure

H-04 (1) Function testingHELP mode

: I N K C H E C K

Page 241: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 241/303244

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

eRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of 

the following sensors will appear.

x Paper feed sensor : A

x Top/bottom limit sensor : C

x Top/bottom center sensor : D

1. Functions

(1) Checking of condition of master ejection sensor andother sensors listed below¡ Displays amount of light received by master ejection sensor.

¡ Runs checks on the paper feed sensor and the top/bottom limit,

top/bottom center sensors.

(1) Checking the condition of master ejection sensor

and other listed sensorsq Access HELP mode H-05, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the PRINT key. For as long as the key is

held down, the master ejection sensor's photo-receiving amount

will be displayed, as a value between 00 and 63.

x Reading the displayed value

¡ [00] : Maximum amount of light received

¡ [63] : No light received

¡ [00 displayed value 45] : No master between sensor

components

* Displayed value when master present > Displayed value when

master absent

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedure

H-05 (1) Sensor / switch condition displayHELP mode

Amount of light received bymaster ejection sensor

Top/bottom limit sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Top/bottom center sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Not used

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 299

Master ejection sensor

 \See page 77

Paper feed sensor1=paper present

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

1 1

Page 242: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 242/303245

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡ Runs checks on the drum master attachment/detachment

position sensor, light reception by the paper ejection jam sensor,

drum stop / paper ejection jam sensing position sensor, and press

roller sensor.

¡ Runs checks on encoders, elevator top limit sensor, A/C mode

sensor and B mode sensor.

¡ Displays amount of light received by paper ejection jam sensor.

(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors

q Access HELP mode H-06, and press the PRINT key.

wRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of 

the following sensors will appear.

x Press roller sensor : A

x Drum stop / paper ejection jam sensing position sensor : B

x Light reception by the paper ejection jam sensor : C

x Drum master attachment/detachment position sensor : D

ePress the PRINT key once more. For as long as the key is held

down, a display indicating the conditions of the following sensors

will appear.

x B mode sensor : A

x A/C mode sensor : B

x Elevator top limit sensor : C

x Encoder checks : D

rPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.

The paper ejection jam sensor's photo-receiving amount will be

displayed, as a value between 000 and 255.

x Paper ejection jam sensor

¡ [10] and under : Paper present

¡ [255] : Paper absent

tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedure

H-06 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode

Drum master attachment / position sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Light reception by the paperejection jam sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Drum stop / paper ejection jamsensing position sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Press roller sensor1 = light beam obstructed

Encoder check 0 or 1(switches between 0 and 1 each time8 edges are sensed)

Elevator top limit sensor1 = light beam obstructed

A/C mode sensor

1 = light beam obstructed

B mode sensor1 = light beam obstructed

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 299

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Amount of light received bypaper ejection jam sensor

1 1

Page 243: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 243/303246

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Checking of condition of switches listed below:¡Displays condition of master cover opening/closing switch, drum

rotation switch, feed tray descend switch, elevator lower limit

switch and ADF cover opening/closing switch as 0 or 1.

¡Displays condition of drum cover switch, paper sensor, elevator

lower limit switch, and master lever switch as 0 or 1.

(1) Checking the condition of the listed switches

q Access HELP mode H-07, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold the PRINT key. For as long as the key is held

down, a display indicating the conditions of the following switches

will appear.

S ADF cover opening/closing switch : A

S Feed tray descend switch : B

S Drum rotation switch : C

S Master cover opening/closing switch : D

 \See page 235

eRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of 

the following switches will appear.

S Master lever switch : A

S Elevator lower limit switch : B

S Paper sensor : C

S Drum cover switch : D

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedure

H-07 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode

Drum cover switch 0 = open

Paper sensor 1=paper present

Elevator lower limit switch 1=push

Master lever switch1 = PUSH

Master cover opening/closing switch 1=open

Drum rotation switch 1 = PUSH

Feed ray descend switch 1 = PUSH

ADF cover opening/closingswitch 1=open

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 298

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Page 244: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 244/303247

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors

q Access HELP mode H-08, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the TEXT item.

ePress and hold down the PRINT key. For as long as the key is

held down, a display indicating the conditions of the following sensors will appear.

S Document sensor : A

S Scanner jam sensor : B

S Document position sensor : C

Document position sensor's photo-receiving amount will be

displayed, as a value between 000 and 255.

x Paper ejection jam sensor

¡ [10] and under : Document present

¡ [255] : Document absent

 \See page 235

1. Functions

(1 ) Checking of condition of sensors and switcheslisted below:

¡Displays amount of light received by document position sensor

and displays condition of scanner jam sensor, and document

sensor as 0 or 1.

¡Displays condition of drum presence switch, master roll FULL

switch, and ADF cover open/closed detection switch, as 0 or 1.

tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedure

H-08 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode

Drum switch 1 = drum present

Not used

Paper roll FULL switch 1 = PUSH

Top cover open/closeddetection switch

1=ADF cover open

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 298, 299

A :1

B :1

C :1

D :1

rRelease the PRINT key. A display indicating the conditions of 

the following sensors will appear.

S Top cover open/closed detection switch : A

S Paper roll FULL switch : B

S Drum switch : D

Amount of light received bydocument position sensor

Scanner jam sensor 1 = jamming

Document sensor1=paper absent

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 1 1

Page 245: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 245/303248

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

(1) Checking the master attachment, jam sensing,

master position and drum stop positions

q Access HELP mode H-09, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡Each time the PRINT key is pressed, the drum stop and jam

sensing position sensors, and the master attachment/detachment

positions sensors, will alternately sense the edge of the shade

plate, then stop.

 \See page 235

1. Functions

(1) Checking of master attachment position, jamsensing position, master detachment position and

drum stop position

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedures

H-09 (1) Function testingHELP mode

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 177

: D R UM P O S . T E S T

Page 246: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 246/303249

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

(1) Testing the functioning of lamp (on/off)

q Access HELP mode H-10, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the indicators will light.

 \See page 235

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

1. Functions

(1) Testing of functioning of lamp (on/off)(2) Testing of functioning of ADF clutches function

2. Operation procedures

H-10 (1), (2) Function testingHELP mode

: C C D T E S T

(2) Testing of functioning of ADF clutches function

q Access HELP mode H-10, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wSelect clutch A or B.

¡ Clutch A

Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key and set to

"TEXT".

¡ Clutch BPress the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key and set to

"TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH".

ePress the TEST PRINT key.

The clutch selected in Step 2) turns "ON".

rTo check the operation of the other clutch, proceed with Steps w)

ande).

T

 \See page 235

tPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Page 247: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 247/303250

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.

¡Display of darkness value for lightest part of document

a Use the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select theTEXT item.

 A value between 000 ("darkest" value) and 255 ("lightest" value)

will be displayed.

¡Display of darkness value for darkest part of document

(relative to lightest part, above)

a Use the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the

PHOTOGRAPH item.

 A value between 000 ("darkest" value) and 255 ("lightest" value)

will be displayed.

1. Functions

(1) Document darkness values and scanner test (for usein factory checks)

(1) Document darkness values and scanner test (for use

in factory checks)

q Access HELP mode H-11, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡ When the PRINT key is pressed, the lamp lights up and the

document is conveyed to the "position for sensing document

size". The sensed size is displayed as a 3-digit number ( 1 1 1 )

and the document is fed out.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedures

H-11 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode

Sensed size display

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

1 1 1

Page 248: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 248/303251

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Check that the increment of both digits occurs at a rate of 

approximately 1 second per implement, so that over a period of 10

second, there is no marked difference between the two values. A 

marked difference indicates abnormality.

¡ Check of thermal head and main PCB unit synchronized signals

a Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the PHOTOGRAPH item.

Two digits will be displayed. The first digit represents a count

based on the thermal head synchronized signal, and the second a

count based on the main PCB unit's start signal. These counts rise

from 0 up to 7, in increments of 1. The increments occur at

intervals of approximately 1 second.

Main PCB unit start signal

Thermal headsynchronized signal

1. Functions

(1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head andmain PCB unit synchronized signals

(1) Checking of shading memory, thermal head and

main PCB unit synchronized signals

q Access HELP mode H-12, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.

¡ Check of shading memory, and display of result

a Press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key as many times as

needed to select the TEXT item.

 An "FFFF" result display indicates the memory is normal. Anyother display indicates abnormality.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedures

H-12 (1) Function testingHELP mode

¡ Display during check

¡ Check result display

0 0

F F F F

1 1

Page 249: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 249/303252

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Checking of condition of sensors listed below:¡ Display of amount of light received by end mark sensor and

master position sensor.

(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch

(1) Checking the condition of the listed sensors

q Access HELP mode H-13, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235

SMaster position sensor

aTo access this display, press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH

key as many times as needed to select the TEXT item.

¡Display of presence/absence of the master on its travel path, as

a numerical value.

" 0": Master present

"63": Master absent

2. Operation procedures

H-13 (1) Sensor/switch condition displayHELP mode

End mark sensor

 \See page 70

Amount of light received byend mark sensor

1 1

Amount of light received bymaster position sensor

1 1

S End mark sensor

¡To access this display, press the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH

key as many times as needed to select the

TEXT/PHOTOGRAPH item.

¡Display of presence/absence of the master on its travel path, as

a numerical value.

<Sensitivity adjustment of the end mark sensor>

 Adjust the sensitivity using the FUNCTION SWITCH key

and SELECT key.

Set the black level to "MAX-10".

Make sure that the difference between black and white is "30"

or larger.

wSelect the sensor below and follow the procedure accordingly.

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Master position sensor

 \See page 72

Master feeding clutch

 \See page 74

Page 250: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 250/303253

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-13 (2) Function testingHELP mode

(2) Function testing of master feeding clutch

q Access HELP mode H-13, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡Press the TEST PRINT key. turns "ON" the master feeding 

clutch once.

T

 \See page 235

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Page 251: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 251/303254

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

(1) Platemaking total counter display

q Access HELP mode H-14, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the total number of 

platemaking is displayed.

 \See page 235

1. Functions

(1) Platemaking total counter display(2) Resetting of count of total plates made in user mode

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedures

H-14 (1),(2) Total countsHELP mode

[F] = platemaking

Platemaking total counter

(2) Resetting the count of total plates made in user mode

q Access HELP mode H-14, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the current value for the

count of total plates made in user mode will be displayed.

wPress the [=] key and CLEAR keys simultaneously, toexecute resetting. The resetting will be memorized in the battery

PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization, "SAVE" will be

displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

C

 \See page 235

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-19  \See page 259

IMPORTANT :

Page 252: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 252/303255

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Function testing of ink motor

1) Testing the functioning of the ink motor

q Access HELP mode H-15, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold the TEST PRINT key. The ink motor will run

for as long as the key is held down.

¡ Remember that ink will be delivered when the ink motor runs.

Take any precautions necessary.

T

 \See page 235

eRelease the TEST PRINT key. The ink motor will stop.T

2. Operation procedures

H-15 (1) Function testingHELP mode

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

: I N K M T R . T E S T

IMPORTANT :

Page 253: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 253/303

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

256

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Rises by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

1***Lowers by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

Correction amount display

(1) Correction of platemaking start position duringonline platemaking

(1) Setting correction of platemaking start position

during online platemaking

q Access HELP mode H-16, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedures

H-16 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 188

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-37  \See page 275

HELP mode H-52,H-57 \See page 283

HELP mode H-53  \See page 285

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

IMPORTANT :

Page 254: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 254/303257

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

H-17 (1) Function testingHELP mode

2. Operation procedure

For electrical parts layout

 \See page 300

(1) Cutter motor function testing

(1) Testing the cutter motor's functioning

q Access HELP mode H-17, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The cutter

motor will run for as long as the key is held down.

eTo stop the cutter motor, either release the FUNCTION SWITCH

key, or alter the cutter limit switch's condition from off to on.

rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The cutter motor will

run for as long as the key is held down.

tTo stop the cutter motor, either release the SELECT key, or

alter the cutter limit switch's condition off to on.

yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

 \See page 235

After executing the cutter motor test, be sure to return the cutter

blade to the original position (operation side).

: C U T M T R . T E S T

IMPORTANT :

Page 255: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 255/303258

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Function testing of roll-up motor

(1) Testing the functioning of the roll-up motor

q Access HELP mode H-18, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The take-up

motor will rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise), so that

the roller inside the master ejection box turns, for as long as the

key is held down.

eTo stop the motor (and the roller), release the FUNCTION SWITCH

key.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedures

H-18 (1) Function testingHELP mode

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For description of operation

 \See page 77

: E J E C T M . T E S T

Page 256: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 256/303259

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

(2) Resetting the count of total sheets printed in user mode

q Access HELP mode H-19, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the current value for the

count of total sheets printed in user mode will be displayed.

 \See page 235

During memorization:

1. Functions

(1) Printing total counter display(2) Resetting of count of total sheets printed in user

mode

H-19 (1),(2) Total countsHELP mode

2. Operation procedures

(1) 7-digit display of count of total sheets printed

q Access HELP mode H-19, and press the PRINT key.For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235

"P"=Print

wPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡When the PRINT key is pressed, the total number of print is

displayed.

Printing total counter

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

wPress the [=] key and CLEAR keys keys simultaneously,

to execute resetting. The resetting will be memorized in the

battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization, "SAVE" will

be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

C

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

P . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-14  \See page 254

IMPORTANT :

Page 257: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 257/303260

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

¡Whether the clump is in the A, B or C mode position is determined by the B mode sensor and the A/C mode

sensor in combination:

A mode position : When the light beam of both the B mode and A/C mode sensor is unobstructed.

C mode position : When the light beam of both the B mode sensor is obstructed and that of the A/C mode

sensor unobstructed.

B mode position : When the B mode sensor senses edge, and the light beam of the A/C mode sensor is

obstructed.

¡If the clump is not in the A mode position when the power is turned on, it will rotate to the B position and stop

there.

wPress and hold down the FUNCTION SWITCH key. The clump

motor will rotate in the reverse direction (counterclockwise), opening out

the clump, for as long as the key is held down.

eTo stop opening of the clump, release the FUNCTION SWITCH

key. (Alternatively, opening will stop automatically when the light

beam of the A/C mode sensor (PS3) is restored).

rPress and hold down the SELECT key. The clump motor will

rotate in the regular direction (clockwise), closing the clump, for as

long as the key is held down.

tTo stop closing of the clump, release the SELECT key.

(Alternatively, closing will stop automatically when the light beam of 

the A/C mode sensor (PS3) is restored).

1. Functions

(1) Function testing of clump motor and clump positionsensing (A/B/C mode position)

(1) Testing the functioning of the clump motor andclump position sensing (A/B/C mode position)

q Access HELP mode H-20, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes. \See page 235

yPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

2. Operation procedures

H-20 (1) Function testingHELP mode

NOTE :

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 167

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 169

B mode

A/C mode

For description of operation

 \See page 80

: C L A M P M . T E S T

Page 258: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 258/303261

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-22 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amountfor platemaking side

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***Sign flag

Shortens by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits.

1***Lengthens by the set amount for

the lower 3 digits.

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

(1) Setting of lengthwise zoom factor correction amount

for platemaking side

q Access HELP mode H-22, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

1 rank: 0.125%

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 186

Mode H-21 is not used

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

IMPORTANT :

Page 259: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 259/303262

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-23 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of photograph mode document sensingdarkness

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting of photograph mode document sensing

darkness

q Access HELP mode H-23, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 190

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-50  \See page 281

1 rank: 0.125%

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Shortens by the set amount for thelower 3 digits.

1***Lengthens by the set amount for

the lower 3 digits.

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

IMPORTANT :

Page 260: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 260/303263

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-24 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinalR/E scanner

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

0001

0010

0011

1111

•If help mode H-24 setting is

required, HELP mode H-25

must be set to "0000".

(1) Setting of reducing offset for reading longitudinalR/E scanner

q Access HELP mode H-24, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

1 rank: 0.25%

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 186

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-25  \See page 264

During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 261: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 261/303264

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-25 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinalR/E of scanner

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

0001

0010

0011

1111

•If help mode H-25 setting is

required, HELP mode H-24

must be set to "0000".

(1) Setting of enlarging offset for reading longitudinal

R/E of scanner

q Access HELP mode H-25, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 186

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-24  \See page 263

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 262: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 262/303265

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-26 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Compensation of document darkness white level inphotograph mode

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Rises by the set amount for thelower 3 digits

1***Lowers by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

(1) Compensation of document darkness white level in

photograph mode

q Access HELP mode H-26, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 189

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-33  \See page 272

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 263: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 263/303266

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-27 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Initialization of all HELP mode settings

(1) Initializing all the HELP mode settings

q Access HELP mode H-27, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wPress the [=] key. The adjustment and specification settings

of the HELP modes will be initialized. (But for the total counts (H-

14 and H-19), only the user mode values will be initialized.) While

initialization is in progress, "SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

 \See page 235

¡ For the values after initialization, see the initialization values for

each mode, and the HELP decals (on the inside of the front

cover).

¡ After initialization, carry out the adjustment and specification

setting operations for the various modes. Inappropriate settings

will results in operational problems.

2. Operation procedures

IMPORTANT :

ePress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

IMPORTANT :

: I N I T I A L I Z E

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Page 264: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 264/303267

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-28 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence, buzzerselection and KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0*** Whether there is aTAPE CLUSTER or not.

There is a TAPE CLUSTER.

1*** There is not a TAPE CLUSTER.

*00*

Selecting buzzer.

Standard (Buzzer sounds)

*01*Buzzer does not sound when trou-

ble occurs.

*10* Does not sound

*11* Does not sound

***0 KEYCARD COUNTER 2

specifications

KEYCARD COUNTER 2

***1 No KEYCARD COUNTER 2

1001 Initial value

(1) Setting of TAPE CLUSTER presence/absence, buzzer

selection and KEYCARD COUNTER 2 specification

q Access HELP mode H-28, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

TAPE CLUSTER

 \See page 119

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 265: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 265/303

Page 266: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 266/303269

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

1. Functions

(1) Test pattern (all shading, sub-scanning directionzoom factor adjustment) platemaking and printing

(1) Test pattern (all shading, poor image area checking,

sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)

platemaking and printing

q Access HELP mode H-30, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wSelect one of the items below, and follow the procedure given for it.

¡ Test pattern 1 (all shading)aUse the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the

PHOTOGRAPH item.

¡Test pattern 3 (sub-scanning direction zoom factor adjustment)

aUse the DOCUMENT MODE SWITCH key to select the

TEXT item.

 \See page 235

2. Operation procedures

H-30 (1) Function checkingHELP mode

¡Test pattern 1

¡Test pattern 3

Once this mode has been entered, it is not possible to switch to

any other mode. To exit this mode, turn off the power.

IMPORTANT :

For adjusting reduction / enlargement

 \See page 186

ePress the PLATEMAKING key to implement platemaking/printing.

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

0 s h t 1 s e t

Page 267: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 267/303270

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-31 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of number of pre-print sheets¡Use this to set a value for the number of pre-print sheets.

"Pre-print sheets" are extra sheets that are printed at the start

of printing, without being added to the print count.

2. Operation procedures

ABCD

0000

0001

0010

0011

0100

0101

0110

0111

ABCD

1000

1001

1010

1011

1100

1101

1110

1111

Item

8 sheets

9 sheets

10 sheets

11 sheets

12 sheets

13 sheets

14 sheets

15 sheets

Item

0 sheet(initial value)

1 sheet

2 sheets

3 sheets

4 sheets

5 sheets

6 sheets

7 sheets

(1) Setting of number of pre-print sheets

q Access HELP mode H-31, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode numberusing the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 268: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 268/303271

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-32 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Confidential safeguard function, selection of firstprint speed, setting of master ejection error sensing

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0*** Not set

Set1***

*0** 1st-speed (about 45 rpm)

*1** JOG speed (about 15 rpm)

**0* Yes

**1* No

***0Not used.

***1

1000 Initial value

Confidential safeguardfunction

Selecting the first print

speed. /Selecting the print

speed for the first sheet

after plate making is com-

pleted.

Master mis-ejection detec-

tion

(1) Confidential safeguard function, selection of first

print speed, setting of master ejection error sensing

q Access HELP mode H-32, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 269: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 269/303272

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-33 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Compensation of document darkness white level intext mode

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Rises by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

1***Lowers by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

(1) Compensation of document darkness white level intext mode

q Access HELP mode H-33, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 189

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-26  \See page 265

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount displaySign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 270: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 270/303273

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-35 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

Mode H-34 is not used

(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Moves to the left by the set

amount of the lower 3 digits.

1***Moves to the right by the set

amount of the lower 3 digits.

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment

q Access HELP mode H-35, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 187

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-36  \See page 274

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 271: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 271/303274

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-36 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing positionadjustment

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Moves toward you by the setamount of the lower 3 digits.

1***Moves backward by the set

amount of the lower 3 digits.

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

***1

*111

(1) Scanner widthwise (operation side) sensing position

adjustment

q Access HELP mode H-36, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 187

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-35  \See page 273

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 272: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 272/303275

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-37 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Adjustment of platemaking start position whenscanner is used

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Rises by the set amount for thelower 3 digits

1***Lowers by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

(1) Adjustment of platemaking start position when

scanner is used

q Access HELP mode H-37, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 188

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-16  \See page 256

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 273: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 273/303276

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-40 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner isused, setting platemaking area (sub-scanning

direction)

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

1*** 350mm

**00 Normal

**01

**10

0000

Dark

Light

Platemaking area

(Sub-scanning direction)

Photograph mode

Initial value

Selected document size

(1) Correction of outline highlight when scanner is

used,setting platemaking area (sub-scanningdirection)

q Access HELP mode H-40, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 188

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-16  \See page 256

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Modes H-38,H-39 are not used.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 274: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 274/303277

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-41 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting,setting of repeat count display

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0*** No automatic iniialization

1*** Initialized in about 2 minutes

*0**Not used

*1**

**0*Count repeat display

Repeat display of count

**1* No repeat display of count

1000 Initial value

Automatic initialization of

the control panel setting

(1) Automatic initialization of the control panel setting,

setting of repeat count display

q Access HELP mode H-41, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 275: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 275/303278

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-42 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of paper selection specification, settingplatemaking area (main-scanning direction)

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

00** B4/A4/B5/A5

10**

*1**

*0**

10914/LT•LG/ST/POST

**00

Paper selecting with the

power ON

B4/10914

**01 A4/LT•LG

**10 B5/ST

**11 A5/POST

0000 Initial value

Selected size

250mm

Platemaking range

(main-scanning direction)

Paper selecting specifica-

tions (inch)

Paper selecting specifica-

tions (A/B size)

(1) Scanner leading edge sensing position adjustment,

setting platemaking area (main-scanning direction)

q Access HELP mode H-42, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 276: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 276/303279

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-43 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy

2. Operation procedures

A B C D Setting

0 0 0 0 Normal (initial value)

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 00 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

Light 1

Light 2Light 3

Light 3

Light 3

Light 3

Light 3

Dark 1

Dark 2

Dark 3

Dark 3

Dark 3

Dark 3

Dark 3

(1) Offset value for the thermal head drive energy

q Access HELP mode H-43, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For description of operation

 \See page 67

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 277: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 277/303280

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-44 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking

2. Operation procedures

A B C D Resistance

0 0 0 0 3825-3908

0 0 0 1 3909-3993

0 0 1 0 3994-4077

0 0 1 1 4078-4162

0 1 0 0 4163-4246

0 1 0 1 4247-4330

0 1 1 0 4331-4415

0 1 1 1 4416-4499

1 0 0 0 4500-4583

1 0 0 1 4584-4668

1 0 1 0 4669-4752

1 0 1 1 4753-4837

1 1 0 0 4838-4921

1 1 0 1 4922-50051 1 1 0 5006-5090

1 1 1 1 5091-5175

(1) Setting of thermal head resistance ranking

q Access HELP mode H-44, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For description of operation

 \See page 67

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 278: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 278/303281

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-50 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of text mode document sensing darkness

2. Operation procedures

Display Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

1***

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

Lighter by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

Darker by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

(1) Setting of text mode document sensing darkness

q Access HELP mode H-50, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

For Standards / Adjustment

 \See page 190

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-23  \See page 262

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Mode H-45, 46, 47, 48 and 49 are not used

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 279: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 279/303282

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-51 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemaking¡Use this to adjust the platemaking darkness for area q of 

HELP mode H-30's test pattern 2.

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting of darkness for test pattern platemaking

q Access HELP mode H-51, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-30  \See page 269

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Display Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

1***

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

*110

*111

Lighter by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

Darker by the set amount for the

lower 3 digits

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 280: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 280/303283

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-52, H-57 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

H-52

00**

11**

**0*

**1*

***1

***0

***1

***0

H-57

0***

0***

1***

1***

Item

I / F auto / manual

setting

DP-10

test pattern

Line scanning

speed

Setting

Manual

Auto(standard)

Standard

DP-10 test pattern only

1.6m sec / line

2.0m sec / line(standard)

3.2m sec / line

4.0m sec / line

0000 0000 Factory setting

(1) Setting of online conditions

¡ Use H-52 to set I/F switching (auto/manual) and online platemaking mode.

¡ Use H-57 to select data transmission speed (time for scanning of 1 line) for

online platemaking.

2. Operation procedures

¡H-52

(1) Setting of online conditions

q Access HELP mode H-52, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-16  \See page 256

HELP mode H-53  \See page 285

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 281: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 281/303284

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-52, H-57 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

¡H-57:Line scanning speed

rPress the STOP key.

tTo also select the data transmission speed (time for scanning of

1 line), carry out this step and the following 2 steps: Access HELP mode H-57, and press the PRINT key.

yUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a new 4-place binary

 value. See the table inw above for 4-place binary values and the

corresponding settings.

iPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

uPress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorizedin the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Page 282: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 282/303285

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-53 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side)platemaking start position for online platemaking

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0***

Sign flag

Moves toward you by the set

amount of the lower 3 digits.

1***Moves backward by the set

amount of the lower 3 digits.

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

*100

*101

***1

*111

(1) Adjustment of widthwise (operation side)

platemaking start position for online platemaking

q Access HELP mode H-53, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Related HELP mode

HELP mode H-52,57  \See page 283

HELP mode H-16  \See page 256

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 283: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 283/303286

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-55 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting of ink check at printing start, cutting operationmode for master cutting, and interlocks

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Item Setting

0*** Ink check

1*** No ink check

*0** 1 stroke = one-way motion

*1** 1 stroke = reciprocating motion

**0* Activated

**1* Deactivated

***0

***1

0100

Setting of ink check, that

triggers ink replenishment if

no ink is detected at printing

start

Selection of cutter operation

mode

Interlock: emergency stop if

top cover or ejection box

open

Not used

Initial value

(1) Setting of ink check at printing start, cutting operation

mode for master cutting, and interlocks

q Access HELP mode H-55, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Mode H-54 is not used.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorizedin the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 284: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 284/303287

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-56 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

(1) Setting for selecting manipulation language

2. Operation procedures

ABCD Manipulation language

0000

0001

0010

0100

0011

0101

0110

Japanese

English

German

Italian

Spanish

French

(1) Setting for selecting manipulation language

q Access HELP mode H-56, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 285: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 285/303288

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-61 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

Display Item Setting

0 0 **

Selection of LC display spec-

ifications

Japanese: Duplo

0 1 ** Japanese: Other

1 0 ** English

1 1 ** Other foreign language

0 0 0 0 Factory setting

(1) Selection of LCD specification

2. Operation procedures

(1) Selection of LCD specification

q Access HELP mode H-61, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Mode H-57 (refer to H-52)Mode H-58, H-59, H-60 are not used

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 286: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 286/303289

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-64 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0*** Sign flag Tone setting

Tone adjusting

*000

Set amount

Standard (initial value : 000 0)

Maximum

*001

*010

*011

(1) Buzzer (tone) setting

2. Operation procedures

(1) Buzzer (tone) setting

q Access HELP mode H-64, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Mode H-62, H-63 are not used

Correction amount display

Sign flag

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 287: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 287/303290

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-66 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0*** C mode master feed out B mode

1***

*0** OFF

*1** ON

*10*

OFF

*11*

ON

***0

Not used

***1

0000 At shipment

Setting for master clump

opening/closing timing for

master attachment

Setting of paper feed sensor 

(loop sensor) ON/OFF

Paper size mode

(long type)

master feed out C mode B mode

(1) Setting: clump opening/closing timing of when amaster is attached; paper feed sensor (loop sensor)

ON/OFF; Paper size mode (long type)

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting: clump opening/closing timing of when a

master is attached; paper feed sensor (loop sensor)ON/OFF; Paper size mode (long type)

q Access HELP mode H-66, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Mode H-65 is not used.

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 288: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 288/303291

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-67 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0001

Set amount

Larger the arching dimension

Smaller the arching dimension

0000

1110

1111

(1) Setting of paper feed length

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting of paper feed length

q Access HELP mode H-67, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 289: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 289/303292

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-68 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0001

Set amount

Larger the paper feed timing

Smaller the paper feed timing

0000

1110

1111

(1) Setting of paper feed timing

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting of paper feed timing

q Access HELP mode H-68, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 290: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 290/303293

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-69 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0000 DP-23S

DP-21S

0001 DP-21L

0011

Setting of model

(1) Setting of model

2. Operation procedures

(1) Setting of model

q Access HELP mode H-69, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 291: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 291/303294

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-70 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

0000 Normal

0001 KEYCARD COUNTER 4

(1) Option setting 1

2. Operation procedures

(1) Option setting 1

q Access HELP mode H-70, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Option setting 1

*Add a DIP switch to the battery board.

IMPORTANT :

Dip switch setting 1, 0, 0

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 292: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 292/303295

c HELP Mode Function and Operation Procedureschap.8

H-76 (1) Adjustment / specification settingHELP mode

1. Functions

ABCD Item Setting

Normal (initial value)

Slightly lighter

Slightly darker

Much darker

00**

01**

10**

11**

Setting

(1) Document darkness correction for text/photographmode

2. Operation procedures

(1) Document darkness correction for text/photograph

mode

q Access HELP mode H-76, and press the PRINT key.

For the basic procedure for accessing HELP modes.

wUse the [0] and [1] numeric keys to enter a 4-place binary value for

the desired correction amount. See the table below for 4-place

binary values and the corresponding correction amounts.

 \See page 235

rPress the STOP key. The HELP mode selection display will

reappear.

a To exit the HELP mode : Turn the power switch OFF.

a To access another HELP mode : Enter the desired mode number

using the numeric keys.

¡During memorization:

1 1 1 S A V E 1 1 1

Correction amount display

A : 1 B : 1 C : 1 D : 1

Mode H-71, H-72,H-73, H-74 and H-75 are not used

ePress the [=] key. The correction amount will be memorized

in the battery PCB unit's EEPROM. During memorization,

"SAVE" will be displayed.

Do not turn off the power before the "SAVE" display has disappeared.

IMPORTANT :

Page 293: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 293/303296

MEMO

Page 294: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 294/303297

Others

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions...........298

(1) Switch / Clutches .................................................298

(2) Sensors ..................................................................299

(3) Lamps / Motors .....................................................300

(4) PCB unit................................................................301

(5) Connector VR/LED Layout and Functions..........302

x Overall Wiring Layout................................................305

Chapter 9

9

Page 295: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 295/303298

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functions

(1) Switches/Clutches

23S0267

3

1

12

8

9

7

11

2

10

4

15

6

13

14

5

Paper ejection clutch DP-23S

Item No. Functions

Microswitch/switch

1

2

3

Opening and closing of the top cover is detected.

4

Whether the drum is set or not is detected.

5

Opening and closing of the front cover is detected.

6

7

ADF cover open/closed detection.

Whether the master ejection core is set or not and full or not is detected.

8

Push switch

15

10

12

JOG switch (drum rotator switch)

Elevator lower limit switch

9

11

13

Master feeding clutch

Master cover open/closed detection

14

ADF clutch B

ADF clutch A

Power switch

Clutch

Paper feed clutch

Paper/master feed elevator descent switch

Page 296: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 296/303299

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

(2) Sensors

23S026819

17

16

18

12

1436

97

811 10 4

15

5 1 2

20

Master is detected at the inlet of the master ejection box.

Jam sensor photo-receiving Paper on the paper delivery side is detected.

Jam sensor photo-emitting Detection of paper on paper ejection side.

Item No. Functions

Microsensor

Photointerrupter

1

2

3 Master clump opening and closing lever A/C mode is detected.

Weather the document is placed or not is detected.

Document JAM is detected.

4 Master clump opening and closing lever B mode is detected.

5 Drum home position and JAM detection position are detected.

6 Master attachment/detachment position is detected.

7 Main motor encoder sensor.

8 Press rol ler ON and OFF is detected.9 Paper/master feed elevator top limit detection.

11 Center position of the print position adjustment is detected.

12 Weather the paper is placed or not is detected.

16

17

18

Master ejection sensor photo-emitting

Master ejection sensor photo-emitting

19

Photo-emitting of the master ejection and JAM detection sensor.

14 Leading edge of paper is detected.

15 Master position is detected.

Loop is detected.

10 Print position limit of the print position is detected.

13 LPU escape timing is detected. DP-23S

2013

Page 297: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 297/303300

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

Item No. Functions

Lamp 1 Document lamp

Thermal head 2 Thermal head

Motor

3 Main motor

4 Paper feed tray elevator motor

6 Roll-up motor

7 Cutter motor

8 Print position adjusting motor

9 Ink pump motor

Scanner stepping motor

Fan motor Paper ejection fan

11

13

10

Plate making stepping motor

5 Master clump opening/closing lever motor

12 Guide roller drive motor DP-23S

(3) Lamps/Motors

23S0269

1

2

12

3

8

10

13

9

11

6

5

7

4

Page 298: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 298/303301

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

Item No. Functions

CCD PCB unit 1 Reading the picture image.

2Inverter PCB unit

3

Lamp lights up.

Control panel PCB unit

4

Control panel key, display.

Ink detection PCB unit

5

Detecting Ink amount in the drum.

6

End mark sensor PCB unit

7

Detection of master presence on master feed travel path, and end mark.

Main PCB unit

8

Processing the image and controlling the machine on the whole.

Battery PCB unit

9

Keeping the total counter and HELP information.

Motor PCB unit

10

Controlling the main motor.

Drive PCB unit Driving the motor.

Regulated power supply Supplying with DC power supply.

11Mini drive PCB unit DP-23S Controlling the LPU (Long Paper Unit).

(4) PCB unit

23S0270

1

3

26

7

11

5

8

9

4

10

Page 299: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 299/303302

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

(5) Connector VR/LED Layout and Functions

1) CCD PCB unit

2) Inverter PCB unit

3) Control Panel PCB unit

CCD   C   N

   1

CN 2

   C   N

   1

CN 1

4) Ink Detection PCB unit

VR 1CN 1

LEDVR / LED Function

VR

LED

* Adjusting the ink detection sensitivity.

Lights up when ink OK is detected.

* : Adjusted at the factory. Do not change.

IMPORTANT :

Page 300: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 300/303303

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

   C   N

   1

   C   N    1

   (   3   2   P   )

   C   N    2

   (   3   0   P   )

   C   N    1

   1

   C   N    1

   0

   C   N    3

   (   2   4   P   )

   C   N    9

   C   N    7

   C   N    8

   C   N    4

   C   N    5

CN 12

CN 14

u 35 u 5

u 26

u 25

SW 1

u 27

u 12

CN 13

CN 6

5) End Mark Sensor PCB unit

6) Main PCB unit

CN 1

CN 2

7) Battery PCB unit (EEPROM PCB)

Page 301: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 301/303304

z Electrical Parts Layout and Their Functionschap.9

FUSE (125V 10A)

CN 4

CN 2

   C   N    1

   C   N    6

   C   N    3

CN 7

CN 9

   C   N    8

CN 5

Mini drive PCB unit DP-23S

9) Drive PCB unit

FUSE (250V 10A)

   C   N

   1

   C   N

   5

   C   N

   4

   C   N

   3

VR 1 VR 2

8) Main Motor PCB unit

      C      N

      3

      C      N

      2

   C   N

   1

VR1

FUSE (125V 5A)

10) Regulated power supply

VR Function

VR 1

VR 2

Pre-stop speed adjustment.

JOG speed adjustment.

Page 302: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 302/303

x Overall Wiring Layout

Page 303: dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

7/27/2019 dp21l,21s & 23s maintenance ver2

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/dp21l21s-23s-maintenance-ver2 303/303